Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

11 In the Choose Template dialog. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. and schedules required for a building project. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. 12 Select DefaultMetric. schedules. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. You learn the terminology.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you will use the default template. click Training Files. the hierarchy of elements. the operation of the software is parametric. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. the parameter is one of association or connection. In this case. and customize the project as necessary. construction. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. If you move the partition. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. 13 Click OK. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and phases when you need it. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. every drawing sheet. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. quantities. and click Open. As you work in drawing and schedule views. If the length of the elevation is changed. In this case. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. For most tutorial projects. drawings. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. how to navigate the user interface. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. review the Revit Architecture templates. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. scope. and residential. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the door retains this relationship to the partition. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. drawing sheets. 2D and 3D view. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. and open Metric\Templates. In the Revit Architecture model. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. and plans. the floor or roof remains connected. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. hence. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. sections.rte.

The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Datum elements help to define project context. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. windows. For example. doors. tags. dimensions. doors. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. dimensions. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Examples include detail lines. and 2D detail components. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and keynotes are annotation elements. and roofs are model elements.When you change something. and reference planes are datum elements. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. filled regions. Understanding the Basics | 7 . tags. walls and roofs are hosts. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. They display in relevant views of the model. programming is not required. levels. They help to describe or document the model. walls. windows. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. grids. If you can draw. and cabinets are model components. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture.

floors. elevation views. and types. for example. for example. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Most often. By using a single project file. Project: In Revit Architecture. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. or bottom of foundation. such as roofs. first floor. To place levels. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. section views. In other cases. from geometry to construction data. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. schedules. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. you do nothing to establish these relationships. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you must be in a section or elevation view. families. you can explicitly control them. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. The project file contains all information for the building design. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. top of wall. views of the project. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. However. This information includes components used to design the model. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. and ceilings. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design.In Revit Architecture. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Often. and so forth). Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. and drawings of the design.

Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. identical use. For example. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. ceilings. A type can be a specific size of a family. However. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. roofs. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. A type can also be a style. learning Revit Architecture is much easier.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. In the following illustration. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. categories of model elements include walls and beams. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . the user interface is labeled. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. In the steps that follow. making it easy to understand what each button represents. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families can be transferred between projects. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. specifically its clear user interface. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. floors. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. System families include walls. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. For example. and similar graphical representation. and levels. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. dimensions. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates.

Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. click (New). In addition. By default. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. This creates a new project based on the default template. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. While working in the drawing area. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. and View. For example. which are listed on the menu. Edit. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . you type the required key combination to perform the command. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File.

The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. when you add a door. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . For example. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. a door type is specified. 9 In the Type Selector. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. When you select the Door tool.

containing buttons grouped by function. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. immediately below the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. In the drawing area. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 13 .

■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. click the tab in the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction .11 Click OK. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. select Views (all). The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. The respective commands display on the Design Bar.

and groups. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. sheets. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. windows). 3D). The browser is dockable. double-click its name. elevations. delete. family category (doors. families. and group name. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. families. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. reports. walls. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. and rename views. To open a view.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . schedules. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name.

14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. The cursor displays as a pencil. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. After creating a browser organization scheme. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. click Wall. Do not click." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. In the bottom left corner of the window. click Cancel. In this case. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Tooltips: To see tooltips. In addition. regarding selected elements in a view. find a keyword on the Index tab. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. If no Help button displays. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. press F1 for context-sensitive help. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. in conjunction with tooltips. In the status bar. Windows: From any window. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. click Modify to end the Wall command. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. Toolbar: From the toolbar. You can use this tri-pane. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. press F1 for help. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name.18 On the Design Bar. 20 Press TAB. When you place the cursor over an element. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . The status bar also provides information. click on the Standard toolbar. There are several tools that help you find information. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). After you are familiar with these tasks. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Click the Help button. You can also press SHIFT+F1.

the view zooms out from the building model.rvt. 5 On the View toolbar. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. In the following steps. For example. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. There are several ways to access zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area.

11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. As you move the mouse. If you do not have a wheel mouse. . on the View toolbar. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 12 Click and hold the mouse button. When you release the mouse button. the view zooms in on the selected area. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. To modify or add snap increments. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 7 Click in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 10 To display SteeringWheels. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE As you zoom in and out.

and select the wall. and click the SteeringWheels tab. Similar controls. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. expand Floor Plans. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 15 To exit the wheel. These are the drag controls. called drag controls. click Settings menu ➤ Options.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and double-click 2nd Flr. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. bottoms. referred to as shape handles. When drawing or modifying a building model. and click Help. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. display along the ends. expand Views (all). as shown. and then using the Zoom tool again. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. For more information about SteeringWheels. moving the wheel to the desired location. Small blue dots. To define settings for SteeringWheels. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. 17 Type ZR. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. Cnst. press ESC.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. Some commands. In this case. you want to move the table closer to the wall. The table moves down. click (Move). 23 Click next to the lower wall. such as Move and Copy. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. to lengthen the wall.18 Click and drag the left control. and click again to specify the ending position. for example. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. as shown. click to specify the starting position. and on the Tools toolbar. After selecting the element to move.

28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Some commands. such as the Lines command. and drag it on top of the table. click Lines. In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move. and click again to end it.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. or press CTRL+Z. select the second item in the list. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 24 Select the plant. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. click the Undo command. on the Standard toolbar. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 On the Undo menu.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . On the Design Bar. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.29 To end the command. click Modify. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Press ESC twice.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. illustrating how building components work together. this tutorial uses imperial units only. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. In Revit Architecture. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. or referenced as a drafting view. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. detail. Use keynotes to annotate a detail.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. Use detail components to define an assembly. but for training purposes. In this tutorial. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. When you have finished these tutorials. and annotate building assemblies. 27 . NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows.

Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. click Training Files. and reference a drafting view. enter Window Head Detail. you will create a drafting view. import a DWG detail. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. If necessary. click Drafting View. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Name. create a reference callout. 3 In the Scale list. and click OK. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. scroll until the folder is displayed. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected.rvt.

5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 10 In the drawing area. 9 Type ZR. The model zooms out. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . select Black and White. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. and click Open. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.dwg. The drawing area is still blank. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. displaying the extents of the detail. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. as shown. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. located directly to the left of the drawing area. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model.In the Project Browser. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail.). 6 In the Colors field list. click Training Files. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim.

12 On the Options Bar. select Detail View: Detail. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. to activate the view selection list. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 13 Click Reference other view. and in the Scale list. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 14 In the drawing area. click Callout. in the Type Selector.The view displays to the specified area.

you will create a detail view defined by a callout.rvt. 3 In the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.The reference callout is created. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. adjust the detail view display settings. in the Type Selector. select Detail View: Detail. c_express_workshop_details_start. select Callout. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click the reference callout tag head. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. and in the Scale list.

select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 8 On the Design Bar. enter Wall Base 1. 5 In the Rename View dialog.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. 6 In the drawing area. under Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. and click Rename. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Detail Views(Detail). for Name. 4 Right-click Detail 0. double-click Wall Base 1. click Modify to clear the selection. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown.

10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . This is the view crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. bordered by a solid line.

and click OK. 14 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. 16 Click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). select As Underlay. under Graphics. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 13 On the View Control Bar. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. right-click. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. for Display Model.

NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. Directly above the drawing area. on the Options Bar. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. click Detail Components. If the crop region is enlarged. Stud. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior .Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. type 1' 6''. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . typical details can easily be placed. 20 In the drawing area. By grouping detail components. 17 On the View Control Bar.Brick on Mtl. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. 19 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and click Create Instance. 23 Using the same method. add the following detail components as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. click Modify to end the command.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. as shown. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 25 In the Project Browser.

Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.4" Slab detail.28 Press ESC to end the command.

or instructions within a construction documentation package. and verify that Horizontal. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. click Browse. For more information about customizing a keynote database. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. special notes. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. and under Keynote Table. In the next exercise. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. Leader. for Full Path. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. map keynotes by material. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. click Training Files. You can customize this list. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. and format keynote styles.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents.rvt. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. in the type selector. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .txt. click Keynote ➤ Element. c_express_workshop_details_start. and Free End are selected. 4 On the Options Bar.

Either move the text inside. 7 Click to place the leader arm. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 8 Click to place the tag. If no value has been specified. Keynoting | 39 . a question mark displays. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area.5 In the drawing area. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 9 Press ESC to end the command.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader.

You will now change all keynotes to keys only. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 16 In the drawing area. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 13 Click to place the tag. click Keynote ➤ Material.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 12 Click to place the leader arm. and click OK. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 Select 07 21 00. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Select Keynote Tags. 19 In the Type Selector. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Only the keynotes remain selected. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views.All items within the selection display in red. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. legends.Boxed. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Click Check None. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. 17 On the Options Bar. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click OK.

In this lesson.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. In this exercise. update the project information element properties. and modify and update the project sheet title block. Add labels to a title block. this tutorial uses imperial units only. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Place views on drawing sheets. Update drawing sheet and project information. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. but for training purposes. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. you will create a sheet. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet.

select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. In the Project Browser. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet.rvt. click Training Files. or in the element properties of the title block.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In Revit Architecture. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. If necessary. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). scroll until the folder is displayed. 3 Click OK.

Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. To pan. and click Rename. Smith and press ENTER. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. enter Sections/Details. under Sheets(all). enter A602. 7 Enter K. For Name. click Modify to clear the selection. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 9 In the Project Browser. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. In this tutorial. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Checker. right-click A602 .4 Type ZR.Unnamed. hold down the wheel and drag. Then. 5 In the drawing area. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. Click OK. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 In the Title Block. roll the wheel. To zoom in and out. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. you can enter ZE to zoom out. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block.

16 Type ZR. 15 In the Options Bar.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. The Family Editor opens. (Left) is selected. For Client Name. 20 Click and type Project Status. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. enter 4/10/2008. 13 Click OK. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. select Text : 1/8''. click Text. enter Design Development. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 18 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. For Project Status. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . Smith. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. select the title block. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. For Project Name. enter J. enter Freighthouse Flats. in the Type Selector.

27 Select Wrap between parameters only. under Category Parameters. as shown. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 29 On the Design Bar. 22 Using the same method. click Label.21 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 23 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. in the Type Selector. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. to add 28 Using the same method. and click. select Label : 3/16''. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. and verify that (Top) are selected. click Modify to exit the command. click (Load into Project). (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. add Project Issue Date parameter. as shown.

and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.txt. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. and under Keynote Table. and click Yes. a viewport displays. enter Keynote Legend . Next you will create. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. representing the view or schedule.Project. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. place and modify a keynote legend. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. you will create. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. In this exercise. for Name. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. click Browse. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. click Training Files. for Full Path.30 In the Reload Family dialog. to a drawing sheet. select Override parameter values of existing types. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 .

Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. and click OK. under Sheets (all). expand Legends. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. under Text. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Sections/Details. and drag Keynote Legend . as shown. double-click A601 . 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. clear Show Headers. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. 8 In the Project Browser. on the Appearance tab.

11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.Project as shown. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. The keynote legend is visible. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.9 Press ESC to clear the selection.

expand Detail Views (Detail). select Filter by sheet. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. not keynotes. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. right-click Keynote Legend . under Legends. 19 Click OK twice. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. click Edit. 15 In the Project Browser.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. and click Properties. enter Keynote Legend . Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet.Sheet. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog.Project. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. for Filter. at the bottom of the Filter tab. for View Name. as shown. The Keynote Legend is now blank. and click OK.

The view title with line displays below the viewport. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. as shown.Title Sheet 1. The view remains selected.The keynote legend is automatically updated. under Sheets (all). and then add and update a Drawing list. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. double-click A0 . Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 .

Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You can specify text attributes for view titles. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. The drawing list remains selected.When you place a view on a sheet. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. 5 In the Project Browser. or omit view titles from sheets. by default. expand Schedules/Quantities. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. 6 Type ZR. Press ESC to clear the selection. define the information to include in a view title. As part of a construction document set. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. 3 In the Type Selector. and zoom in on the drawing list. as shown. Revit Architecture displays a view title. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties.

Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. while pressing SHIFT. clear Appears In Drawing List. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.Sections/Details and select A801 . under Sheets (all). Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. including only sheets that contain views. select A602 . 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Ceiling Plans. under Identity Data. right-click the selected sheets. The drawing list display is updated. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

a curtain wall. As you develop the building design. After the beginning exercises. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. it is good practice to test the constraints. 57 . For example. a central service core. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. If the grid moves. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. the wall or column will move with it. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software.

but contains no geometry. click Training Files. In the drawing area in the right pane. click New. The new project opens. For this project. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. The project is stored as a single file. notice four elevation markers. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. In practice. you will use the default template. 3 Under Template file. levels. under Create new. In views that display elevation markers. East. you use a template that is provided with the software. verify that the second option is selected. and customize the project as necessary. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area.rte. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. such as a door or window. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. Creating the Project In this exercise. you load any required family type that is not in your project. from the product library. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. construction. To create the project file. and click Browse. you design inside the elevation markers. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. South. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. West. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. views. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. and residential. 5 Click OK. and settings. under Projects. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. locate the Project Browser. with an RVT extension.

10 In the Project Browser. schedules. double-click Metric. created by the template. 8 Under Floor Plans.rvt) is selected. expand Views (all). click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Ceiling Plans. Two level lines. then expand Floor Plans. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 Click Save.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. and other properties. and on the General tab. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. 7 If necessary. and click Training Files. content and building model reports. As you design and document your building model. and delete them. These views are customizable: you can rename them. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Sheets (all). and duplicate levels. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). notice the Legends. verify that Project Files (*. NOTE If you create a project without a template. as well as change their names. sheets. will be accessible from the Project Browser. 14 For File name. and elevation views created in the project by the template. Groups. you will want to save your work frequently. such as schedules and legends. duplicate them. You can add. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. display in the south elevation. change their properties. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. and Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. Schedules/Quantities. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. reflected ceiling plan views. Creating the Project | 59 . 15 For Save as type. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. heights.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. delete. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. enter Revit Retail Building. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 13 In the file window. Families. double-click South. the view you see in the drawing area. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. and families in your project. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. view the Save reminder interval.

and double-click South. so that when one level moves. and press ENTER. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. Adding Project Levels on page 60. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. When you begin designing. After you modify the two default levels. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. the other levels move and change with it. doors. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls.17 Proceed to the next exercise. or constrained. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. enter 00 Foundation. You learn how the levels are locked. You change the names of the 2 default levels. to each other. and windows within the building model. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. expand Views (all).

and press ESC. As you move the cursor. 16 Enter 3750. This is the Options Bar. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. which should display by default. and click Basics. If it does not. and click OK. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. By default.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. view the Design Bar. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. Next. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER. right-click. and press ENTER. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. enter 0. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. When you add the new level. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click Plan View Types. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. enter -1800. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. enter 01 Entry Level. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. and press ENTER. not all the tabs are visible. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. and then move it up. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. 13 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. Adding Project Levels | 61 . click Level. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans.

26 Press ESC. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. under Floor Plans. you add another level. using a different option. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. click (Pick Lines). click Modify to end the command. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Rename. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. If you create a level by copying it.18 In the Project Browser. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 21 In the Project Browser. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. or on the Design Bar. and for Offset. enter 3750. click Level. 19 Click OK. right-click Level 3. Next. and rename the corresponding views. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 Click to place the level line. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. and enter 02 Level. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. and move it slightly upward.

and you can move them independently. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Notice that by moving the top level. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Adding Project Levels | 63 .Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. all the levels move. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. If you select a level and click its lock. the levels are no longer constrained. as shown.

until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. select (Draw). you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. 3 On the Options Bar. In a later exercise. On the Design Bar. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. double-click 00 Foundation. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. so that if the roof elevation changes. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . specify a start point for the grid line. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Grid. When the grid is complete. Move the cursor up. and specify the grid line endpoint. the column height changes as well. In the following exercise. click Modify. under Floor Plans.

Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. enter 7500 mm. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. enter 7500 mm. Click to place the grid line. Next. click (Pick Lines). Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. enter 4500 mm. Enter A. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and click to place the line. On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. for Offset. click Grid. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and for Offset. for Offset. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and click to place the line.

click Grid. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. and specify the grid line endpoint. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. click Grid.8 Press ESC. On the Options Bar. as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

14 On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 18 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 22 While pressing CTRL. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click (Aligned). 15 Starting with grid line A. 21 Press ESC twice. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. select grid lines C and 3. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. click Dimension.

At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. click and drag the blue circular grip up. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog.5mm Bubble with Gap. enter 50mm. 24 Press ESC. click . and press ESC. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. If necessary. 29 In the Name dialog. enter 6. click the value for Center Segment. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. At the left endpoint of the grid line. and select None. click Duplicate. 31 For End Segments Length.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. (Element Properties). 33 On the Design Bar. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. By pinning these central grid lines. and on the Options Bar. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click OK twice. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. and select grid line A. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. click Modify. select grid line 5. until it is closer to grid line A. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. until it is closer to grid line 5. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. Two pins display on the grid lines. and press ESC. click Modify. 26 In the drawing area. and click OK. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The pins are hidden.

40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 35 In the Type Selector. 37 Select the grid lines again. click (Grid Intersection). select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. click Modify. and in the Type Selector. click Finish. The original continuous grid lines are restored. For Place By. 36 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector.5mm Bubble with Gap. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). and press ESC.5mm Bubble. select Grid : 6. click Structural Column. and on the Options Bar. select Grid : 6. select all of the grid lines.

select 01 Entry Level. 43 Press ESC. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 47 Enter 9000. 46 On the Options Bar. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 45 While pressing CTRL. and press ENTER. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. If it is unlocked. 52 On the Options Bar. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. click Camera. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 48 On the Standard toolbar. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . lock it. click Activate Dimensions. for From. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. select grid line A. Next. and unlock it.

■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. and click to place the target point of the camera. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.

In the Rename View dialog. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. enter To Building. When you finish adding beams. The current view. Adding Beams In this exercise. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. and then copy them to subsequent levels. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. and click Rename. named 3D View 1 by default. expand 3D Views. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Views (all). Right-click 3D View 1. Adding Beams on page 72.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. displays in bold under 3D Views.

8 While pressing CTRL. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . The view is currently set to Coarse. click Finish. 4 Click Medium. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. under Floor Plans. the icon on the right side of the scale. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. view the icons on the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. The selected grid lines display as red. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. click Beam. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. under 3D Views. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. select each grid line. Adding Beams | 73 . 10 In the Project Browser. click (Create Beam On Grid).

click (Default 3D View). All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 13 On the Design Bar. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. and click OK. click Modify. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. right-click. and click Select All Instances. 12 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 06 Roof.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. press and hold SHIFT. select 02 Level. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. under Floor Plans. 14 Select one of the beams. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

20 Click Cancel. All of the columns display as red. view the Top Level parameter. 06 Roof. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. Adding Beams | 75 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. resize the view to see the entire structure. right-click. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. 21 With the column selected.to the 5th level. select 06 Roof. and click Element Properties. When you created the columns. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. right-click. double-click To Building. 22 On the Options Bar. (Element Properties). under 3D Views. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and if necessary. for Top Level. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. under Instance Parameters. click 24 Press ESC. and click Select All Instances. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column.

76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. 28 Save the drawing. press ESC to exit the command before continuing.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. as lines only. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. but you want to display them in less detail. under Elevations.

Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. you create 8 framing elevation views. Adding Braces on page 77. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. double-click 00 Foundation. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. under Floor Plans. click Framing Elevation. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure.29 Proceed to the next exercise. To better add the braces to the structure. Adding Braces In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. and press ESC to end the command. Adding Braces | 77 .

NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. but when placed the braces are placed. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 8 In the Type Selector. press ESC twice. and when the endpoint snap displays. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. click Brace. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. The associated framing elevation view displays.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 11 Using the same technique. click to specify the start point of the brace. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 7 On the Design Bar. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. After you add the final brace. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected.

Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. Adding Braces | 79 . delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. The height of the roof lowers. and press ENTER.

80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. and press ENTER. enter 10000 mm. but this time add them from right to left. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. double-click 00 Foundation. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. under Floor Plans. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. 14 On the Standard toolbar.

23 In the Project Browser. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). Adding Braces | 81 . 19 In the Project Browser. enter 12000 mm. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. and press ENTER. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 21 Select grid line A. click Activate Dimensions. NOTE As you add braces. double-click 00 Foundation. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. as shown in the 3D view below.

(Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. Creating a Foundation on page 82. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground.24 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Standard toolbar. double-click 00 Foundation. beams. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and if necessary. double-click {3D}. 31 Save the drawing. click and roof height. grid size. under 3D Views. Test connectivity of the columns. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. and drag it away from the structure. lock it. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. under Elevations. 29 In the Project Browser. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans.

click Foundation ➤ Isolated. A warning displays. 9 Close the warning dialog.rfa. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. click Training Files. The pile cap has been added in the view. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. double-click 00 Foundation. for View Range.Before you can add the pile caps. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. and press ESC twice. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. for Level. Creating a Foundation | 83 . under Floor Plans. and click View Properties. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. After you load the pile cap family. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. Click OK twice. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. The foundation pile cap now displays. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the drawing area. and expand Structural Foundations. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Unlimited. under View Depth. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. expand Families. click Edit. In the View Range dialog. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and how to load specific families into a project. In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents.

and click Create Similar. press ESC twice.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. under 3D Views. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. When the final pile cap is placed. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.

and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. beams. It is not available in a perspective or camera view.14 Close the file with or without saving it. under 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Select All Instances. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. right-click. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. and brace families into the project. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and braces that you used to create the building structure. you change the types of the columns. 2 Select one of the columns. double-click {3D}. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. You load new column. beam. All columns in the building model display as red.

You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. and click OK twice. In the following steps. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. The brace type changes. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. the braces as well as the beams change. for Type. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. click (Element Properties). select the braces in the elevation one by one.2X101. click Brace.5CHS. and click Select All Instances. click Duplicate. click Modify. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. This not the size that you want to use. 15 In the Project Browser. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 4 On the Design Bar. enter 75mm. and click OK. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. 13 In the Name dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). enter 75mm. click Modify. under Dimensions. 19 On the Design Bar. right-click. double-click Elevation 1-a. The building model displays the round hollow columns. click Modify. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .3 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. you change the brace type. click (Default 3D View). 14 In the Type Properties dialog. and changing its size parameter.9. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 9 In the Type Selector. 17 While pressing CTRL. 18 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. for d. click Edit/New.6X15. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams.

the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. After the files are linked. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . select Auto . the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. click Training Files. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 3 Under Positioning. select m_RRB_structure_complete. and click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Origin to Origin.

select the linked Revit model. Grids. under Elevations. 5 On the Tools toolbar. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. 9 In the drawing area. while pressing CTRL. click Copy. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. 6 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar.4 In the Project Browser. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. however. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Levels 00 through 06. click (Copy/Monitor). select Multiple. After the link is established. In this case. depending on the project. double-click South. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. and click Select Link. and walls could also be copy/monitored. structural members.

select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). click Finish. while pressing SHIFT. for Floor Plan views. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 18 Using the same method. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish mode. under Floor Plans. 15 In the New Plan dialog. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display.10 On the Options Bar. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. right-click Level 1. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . delete the Level 2 floor plan. 16 Click OK. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. First. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. and click Delete. click OK.

90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Name. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 26 In the Project Browser. enter Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 21 In the drawing area. right-click. right-click. 25 In the View Templates dialog. 24 In the New View Template dialog. select the Topography : Surface. under Floor Plans. click OK. 20 In the drawing area. double-click 01 Entry Level. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1.19 In the Project Browser. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click OK. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. under Floor Plans.

33 Click at the upper left of the grid. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. under Names. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . double-click Site. select Floor Plans.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Floor Plans. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 34 In the 3D view that displays. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. click Camera.

expand 3D Views. and click Rename. such as roofs. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Floors In this exercise. click Training Files. 36 In the Rename View dialog. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . stairs. enter To Building. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. Adding Floors on page 92. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. and click OK. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. To create floors.rvt. and railings are also created from sketches.35 In the Project Browser. Some other Revit Architecture elements. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click 3D View 1.

click Dimension. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. and elements in the current view display as gray. Do not lock the dimension. You are now in the Sketch Editor. past the first vertical grid line. double-click 01 Entry Level. Adding Floors | 93 . click Floor. Move the cursor to the left. On the Sketch tab. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Leave this dimension unlocked. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. select the top floor line. If the grid changes size. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. On the Options Bar. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and then the first horizontal grid line. click Lines.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. At the top left corner of the grid. under Floor Plans. click (Rectangle).

and click the temporary dimension value. Move the cursor to the left dimension. Select and lock the dimensions.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. and change their values to 300 mm. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Do not lock the dimensions. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. At the top left corner of the grid. and then press ESC. click Modify. Enter 300. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . They display on the floor sketch. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. press ENTER. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select the top floor line.

■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. Adding Floors | 95 . click Quit Sketch. Next. and lock the dimensions. click Edit. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. On the Options Bar. enter 1500mm. and for Offset. click Lines. under Floor Plans. on the Design Bar. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. On the Sketch tab. double-click 02 Level. Select the three remaining floor lines. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. click (Pick Lines). using a different sketching technique. and on the Options Bar.8 Select the floor. click Floor. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. and press ESC. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines.

21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 20 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. click (Rectangle). Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. click Floor. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. double-click 03 Level. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and a lock icon displays. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 16 On the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor displays. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 18 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 17 On the Sketch tab. 14 On the Design Bar. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. click Finish Sketch. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click (Align).

double-click 01 Entry Level. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. and click OK. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. select 05 Roof Garden. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Alternatively. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. Adding Floors | 97 . 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 32 Select the floor. under Views ➤ 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. click Edit. under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 31 In the Project Browser. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. and lock the edges. 35 On the Sketch tab. double-click {3D}. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Finish Sketch.24 On the Design Bar. 33 At the top left corner of the grid.

You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. Adding a Roof In this exercise. click Training Files. To create the roof. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. ■ ■ For Offset. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. and press ENTER. Click (Pick Lines). 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . When a blue dashed line displays. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Lines.rvt.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 06 Roof. Adding a Roof on page 98. click to place the roof line. enter 1800 mm.

enter 300 mm. for Offset. click to place the roof line. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). move the cursor slightly below the grid line. and when the blue dashed line displays.6 Select grid line 5. Adding a Roof | 99 . 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 7 On the Options Bar.

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area.10 Press ESC. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click (Trim/Extend). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select the roof.

The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. move the cursor down below the roof. and click to specify the section. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. and press ENTER. 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Section. click (Add new points to the slab shape). on grid D. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. for Elevation. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter -100 mm. 17 On the Design Bar.14 On the Options Bar. Adding a Roof | 101 .

102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. click Modify. for Structure. under Construction. (Element Properties). select Variable. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. double-click 06 Roof. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. select the roof. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. for Structure [1].20 On the Design Bar. In section. 30 Click OK 3 times. under Floor Plans. click Edit. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar.

Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. 40 In the Type Selector. select each edge.31 On the Design Bar.Roof Edge. In this case. select Fascia : Fascia . and press DELETE. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 38 In the 3D view. on the View Control Bar. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 33 In the warning dialog. 41 Starting with the left front edge. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. zoom in to the roof. select the section line. moving counter-clockwise. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. click (Default 3D View). click Modify. click OK. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. Adding a Roof | 103 . the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. 37 If necessary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

42 On the Design Bar. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. click Modify. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. so if you resize the grid. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add a curtain wall. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. the curtain wall resizes with it. under 3D Views.

select Curtain Wall : Storefront. enter 1050 mm. for Spacing. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. Click OK twice. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. for Type. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Under Construction. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . click Duplicate. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. The type is saved in the project. and click OK. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select 01 Entry Level.rvt. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. click Training Files. select 05 Roof Garden. for Join Condition. enter Retail Storefront. enter 600 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click to place the first curtain wall segment. and move it slightly toward the building interior. click 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. 6 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 2100 mm. For Offset. When you duplicate a type. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. click Wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Level. for Spacing. For Height. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties).

View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Dimension. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 15 On the View Control Bar. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . These dimensions are not in a sketch. If the grid moves. double-click To Building.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. you can delete the dimensions. under 3D Views. so they remain in the view. click (Trim/Extend). 13 On the Design Bar. and trim each curtain wall segment. and lock the dimensions. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. If you want to hide them. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating an Entrance | 107 .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance on page 107. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

and double-click South. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. click All. 4 On the Model Categories tab.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Under Visibility. under the element list. and click None. All the elements in the list are selected. clear one element to clear all the elements. under Views (all). you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Do not select Columns. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 7 Click OK. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 5 Under Visibility. in the center of the 01 Entry Level.

15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. in the Type Selector. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. and click OK. under 3D Views. select System Panel : Solid. Creating an Entrance | 109 . and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 18 On the View Control Bar. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. press and hold CTRL. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. select Architectural Elevation. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. click Modify. double-click {3D}.9 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. in this case an architectural elevation. 17 In the Project Browser. 10 Select 1 panel. 16 On the View Control Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 12 With the panels selected.

20 In the Project Browser.19 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click South. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building. under 3D Views.

select another mullion to the right. click Add or Remove Segments. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 27 On the Options Bar. and click to select it. select One Segment. 24 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 32 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. and unpin it. Creating an Entrance | 111 .23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line.

and view the new entrance. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 34 On the View toolbar. and unpin it. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . press TAB until it is selected. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. select it. click (Default 3D View).

open the North elevation.38 Press DELETE. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . and add an entrance to the north side of the building. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 3rd. 39 Using the same process. 40 Optionally. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and 4th panels. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.

select 02 Level.rvt. click Training Files. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. under Floor Plans. and click View Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Click OK. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. 3 Right-click in the view. for Underlay. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics.

enter Display Area. 8 Select the callout.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. The cursor changes to a pencil. select the grip closest to the callout head. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. and click to complete the callout. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 9 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. click Callout. under Floor Plans. and click OK. which indicates you must draw the callout.

15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. and click Flip Section. 14 Press ESC. 16 Select the section box. 13 Select the section line. click Section. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . as shown. right-click. 12 Draw a section line.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Loc Line. 27 On the Options Bar. right-click Section 1. for Prefer. click (Align). 24 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . 18 In the Rename View dialog. 21 In the Type Selector. click Dimension. select Basic Wall : Interior . Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay.135mm Partition (2-hr). select Wall faces. select Finish Face: Exterior.17 In the Project Browser. Click (Rectangle). enter Section Display Area. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. and click Rename. 26 On the Design Bar. Lock both alignments. click Wall. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click OK. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. double-click 01 Entry Level. expand Sections (Building Section). 25 Press ESC twice.

and lock the dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Ceiling. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.) 36 Press ESC twice.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. under Sections (Building Section). 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. and lock the dimension. 37 In the Project Browser. under Ceiling Plans. Next. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 38 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. 32 In the Type Selector. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click Section Display Area.

under Sections. 43 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). and click (Element Properties). ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. under Constraints. and click to select the walls. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. Select the 02 Level Floor.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. and click OK. press TAB until you select the wall chain. double-click Section Display Area. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2700 mm. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. for Base Offset. for Top/Base. enter 2700 mm. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . click to select it. for Height Offset From Level. 41 On the Options Bar. under Ceiling Plans. and click to select the walls. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. click Attach. double-click 01 Entry Level. 47 In the Project Browser. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. under Constraints. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. On the Options Bar. click Modify. 46 Press ESC. and click OK. and press ESC.

56 In the Element Properties dialog. 58 On the Edit toolbar. under Construction.49 In the Project Browser. view the ceiling structure. click Edit. 54 Click OK. click (Rotate). 52 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . 55 In the Type Properties dialog. click Cancel. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Ceiling Plans. for Structure. click Edit/New. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. double-click 01 Entry Level. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. click Cancel. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog.

62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. and press ENTER. enter 45.60 Click. 61 Press ESC. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 .

under 3D Views. 65 On the View Control Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. click Shadows Off.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 66 Optionally. click Shadows On. double-click To Building. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 64 On the View Control Bar.

you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . click Training Files. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and copy it to the 05 Level. under Floor Plans.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. and click to create a reference plane to the right. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and for Offset. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to create a reference plane to the left. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. Move the cursor over grid line B.rvt. click Ref Plane. enter 1500 mm. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser.

and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3.5 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. click Stairs. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the left reference plane. and 3. C. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2. click Modify. 7 Using the same method. and specify a point to create first stair flight. shorten the right reference plane.

select Basic Wall : Generic . ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. including its handrails. 10 On the Options Bar. Click (Rectangle).225mm Masonry. and specify a point. Move the cursor down. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . and select the 2nd reference plane. select Finish Face: Interior. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. beyond the end of the stair. 12 In the Type Selector. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. click Wall. The complete stair displays.

Select the bottom of the stair. and click to select it. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. enter 1200 mm. Select the wall. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Lock the dimension. click Align. click Dimension. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 Using the same technique.15 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment. Click Modify. Select the interior face of the wall. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. select Wall faces. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. and specify a point away from the wall. and press ENTER. select the dimension value. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. for Prefer.

click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. clear Tag on Placement. select both reference planes. TIP To flip the door swing. and press DELETE. The stair and walls move to the left. 27 In the Type Selector. Because the dimension is constrained. 24 On the Standard toolbar. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. a warning displays. 28 On the Options Bar.21 Select the dimension. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. click Door. 25 While pressing CTRL. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. (Undo). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . and press DELETE. 23 Select the stair. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm.

and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Click OK. click Align. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. and move the cursor to spin the building model. (Element Properties). verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. For Top Constraint. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). select 05 Roof Garden. 35 On the View toolbar. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 44 On the Tools toolbar. select 00 Foundation. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. select all 4 walls. for Base Constraint. (SteeringWheels). click 36 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Multistory Top Level. (Default 3D View). you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Under Constraints. click Modify. 33 Select the stair. (Rectangle). 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. but if you view the top level of the building. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser.30 On the Design Bar.

52 In the Select Levels dialog. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. and lock the alignment. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. on the View toolbar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. and click OK. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. click see the roof. and lock the alignments. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. For Top Constraint. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 56 Select the shaft. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. for Base Offset. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. click 59 On the View toolbar. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. enter 300 mm. (Default 3D View).55 In the Project Browser. Under Constraints. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). By offsetting the base. (SteeringWheels). and click OK.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View Properties. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Right-click in the view. under Floor Plans. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 06 Roof. click Training Files. and click OK. for Underlay. under Graphics. click Wall.

14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. and click Open View. click Edit Profile. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Lines.5 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. 15 In the error dialog. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. enter 9750. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. and click (Fillet arc). 11 In the Go To View dialog. select Elevation: South. click (Align).225mm Masonry. and then select the right face of the wall. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 17 On the Options Bar. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 On the Design Bar. click Remove Constraints. and press ENTER. The exact placement is not important. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. click .

as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . under 3D Views. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. and click (Circle). click . 22 In the Project Browser.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. click Finish Sketch. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. double-click {3D}.

134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.

and open Metric\m_RRB_host.4. click Component. TIP After you place the 1st planter.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 6 In the Type Selector. double-click 05 Roof Garden.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector.5 Meters. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. and press ESC twice. 5 On the Basics tab.rvt. select M_RPC Tree . between grid lines C and D. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. as shown. click Training Files. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. click Component.

10 In the Project Browser. and in the Type Selector. double-click 05 Roof Garden. for Type. 16 Click Apply. double-click {3D}.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. click Floor. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 11 Select one of the trees. under 3D Views. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. as shown. For Offset. under Dimensions.8 On the View toolbar. select M_RPC Tree . under Floor Plans. click Duplicate. 21 On the Design Bar. enter 2400 mm. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog.5 Meters. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. under Floor Plans. click Edit/New. for Height.5 Meters. double-click 01 Entry Level. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Lines. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter Japanese Cherry 1. (Element Properties). 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. and click OK. and then click OK twice. View the roof. 17 While pressing CTRL. select the 2 remaining trees. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm. 14 In the Name dialog. click (Default 3D View). and on the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.

and click to sketch a line. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. for Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. 29 On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . enter 0 mm. and click to sketch a line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. click (Draw).23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B.

33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B.30 On the Options Bar. 34 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. move the cursor up 900 mm. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to finish the line. 32 Press ESC. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. and click to finish the line. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 35 Select the line that you just drew. clear Chain. click (Trim/Extend).

45 Click OK. click Finish Sketch. under Constraints. enter -250 mm. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. When you render an image. enter Sidewalk. near Column E5. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. click Component. 48 In the Type Selector. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. and click so he is facing the column. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 43 Click OK twice. The completed sidewalk displays. for Height Offset from Level. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. select M_RPC Male : Alex. a photorealistic image displays. select Rotate after placement. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. Next. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk.38 On the Design Bar. In plan view. as shown: (Element Properties). 42 In the Name dialog. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 39 Select the sidewalk. 49 On the Options Bar.

53 Move the cursor clockwise. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex.NOTE If necessary. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 54 In the Type Selector. click Camera. 52 In the Type Selector. 56 Press ESC twice. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. about 30 degrees. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click to place her on the sidewalk. and click (Element Properties). and place it along the sidewalk behind him. click the car. select M_RPC Beetle. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown.

and on the Options Bar. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. under Constraints. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 .59 In the Element Properties dialog. enter -300 mm. 64 Select Alex. double-click To Building. If the sidewalk changes height. When you select a host for a component. under Elevations. double-click West. click Pick Host. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. click Pick Host. Next. for Offset. 65 Click the sidewalk. under 3D Views. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 66 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. 60 In the Project Browser. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 63 Click the sidewalk. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 68 Proceed to the next exercise. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. After the service core is positioned.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. and replace them with a service core.

click Training Files. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. 5 On the View toolbar. click 6 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. and shaft opening.rvt. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. 3 Select the entire stairwell. including the stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). walls. double-click 05 Roof Garden. you delete the entire stairwell. 4 Press DELETE. under Floor Plans.

click OK. expand Groups. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 00 Foundation. click Training Files. double-click 01 Entry Level. and on the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. and notice that the linked file is listed. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. click (Align). 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. click Modify. expand Model.rvt. and click Create Instance.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 14 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. 13 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. and zoom in to the linked instance. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. right-click m_RRB_core.

or if the group layout is expected to change. and click to align the center. (SteeringWheels). NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. click Modify. 20 On the View toolbar. click Ungroup. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. click 21 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the core. ■ ■ Click grid line C. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click (top down view).16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. (Default 3D View).

You copy the railing type into your project from another project. you add glass railings around the floor edges. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. where it is hosted within a railing family. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. After you modify it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.rvt.

and Parapet. expand Families. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.rvt. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. under Floor Plans. expand Renderings. and click to split the floor. Handrail only. click Edit. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. 3 In the Conference project. 13 On the Tools toolbar. in the Project Browser. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and open Metric\m_Conference. The rendering displays. click OK. double-click 02 Level. and select Glass. click Training Files. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click (Split). press and hold CTRL. and expand Railings.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. The floor sketch displays. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 5 Expand Railing. and on the Options Bar. and double-click Lounge Perspective. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

and click the lock to lock the alignment. click (Align). 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to draw another line. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. and on the Options Bar. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click Modify. click Lines. 24 On the Tools toolbar. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. verify that Chain is not selected. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. and click to draw another line. 25 Select grid line B. and click to place it. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor.15 On the Design Bar.

click Railing Properties. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. click Finish Sketch. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK. For Offset. 29 On the Design Bar. and click the lock to lock the alignment.26 Select grid line D. select Glass. enter 100 mm. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 31 In the Revit dialog.rvt project. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click (Align). click Railing. Lock the dimensions. and lock the alignment. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). for Type. click Dimension. 30 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 .

38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension.37 On the Design Bar. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Camera. click Dimension. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 39 Click Finish Sketch.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You can view the railing that you just added.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

lofty ceilings. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. and a roof garden. balconies. 153 . NOTE For training purposes.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. exterior fire stairs. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. slight modifications to the building design have been made. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits.

154 .

Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. 155 . you learn how to create views from a building model. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. section. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. including plan. how to create section and elevation views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. elevation. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Floor Plans.

9 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan.2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Level 2. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog. click the current scale. double-click Vicinity Plan. 11 Under Floor Plans. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. enter Vicinity Plan. Next.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 Right-click.rvt. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.

Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. select 1:100. click Elevation.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Scale. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 4 On the Options Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.

and double-click Level 1. 10 In the Rename View dialog. double-click South East. for Scale. under Elevations. select Section: Building Section. under Elevations (Building Elevation). enter South East. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and click OK. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor down. expand Floor Plans. click Section. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 14 In the Type Selector. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. select 1:100. under Views (all).

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .

and click to place it. click Split Segment. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 23 On the View Control Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. click Modify. using the blue circular drag grip. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . 24 Select gridline F. expand Sections (Building Section).

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.25 On the Design Bar. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. click Modify. To create each view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. under Floor Plans. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select 1:50. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Type Selector. Creating Callout Views | 167 .rvt.Resulting callout view . click Callout. select Floor Plan. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. for Scale.

and select the callout boundary. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. ■ Select the middle grip. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.

Creating Callout Views | 169 . and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. enter Enlarged Stair Plan.7 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:50. click Callout. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. under Sections (Building Sections). select Detail View: Detail. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 13 In the Type Selector. for Scale. double-click Section 1. 9 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.■ Move the cursor diagonally down.

expand Detail Views (Details). and click OK. 18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 171 .17 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. under Detail Views (Details). double-click Roof Overhang Detail.

click Training Files. and click Open. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans.rfa.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.rvt. select Custom-Section Head. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 1. the elevation markers. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . open Metric\Families\Annotations. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.

4 On the Design Bar. and select 2. Section Tail . 10 On the floor plan. On the floor plan. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.Custom. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 .The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. enter 12. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. Section Tail – Filled. 22 In the Name dialog. 19 Click OK. for Section Head. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Under Category. 15 Under Category. click the Annotation Objects tab. and click OK. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load into Project.Filled. click Duplicate. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 12 For Section Tag. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. scroll to Section Marks. enter Section Head – Custom. select the current project. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and select 3. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. and click OK. and click OK. click Edit/New.5mm Square. and click OK twice. clear any others. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Section Head . . select the section line. and can be applied to the section line. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. scroll to Section Line. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.

and click OK. and click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.23 In the Type Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select 12. 39 Click OK twice. select Custom-Callout Head. Click OK. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. For Line Weight. enter 6 mm. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Load into Project. 30 On the Design Bar. clear all others. For Corner Radius. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. and click Open. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 In the drawing. for Elevation Tag. and on the Options Bar. . select the callout. 34 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape.rfa. notice the square elevation markers that display. On the floor plan. 27 Click OK twice. open Metric\Families\Annotations. select the current project. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. Click OK. and on the Options Bar. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 12.5mm Square. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. click Duplicate. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. click Edit/New. select Square. . click Training Files. select 3. For Dimensions ➤ Width. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 40 Press ESC. for Callout Tag.5 mm.

47 Select Callout Leader Line. You learn to create view templates. filters. 49 Click OK. 46 Under Category. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and select 4. select Dash. scroll down to Callout Boundary. click the Annotation Objects tab. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . view regions. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 43 Under Category. and visual overrides. 45 For Line Pattern. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. masking regions. and select 7. expand Callout Boundary.

Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and apply it to multiple elevation views.rvt. click (Hide Crop Region). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click East.Creating a View Template In this exercise. click Zoom to Fit. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations. click Training Files. To accomplish this. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click (Show Crop Region). and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 5 On the View Control Bar. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 2 On the View Control Bar. The crop region displays as red. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 6 On the View Toolbar.

Callouts. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Entourage. levels.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. Creating a View Template | 177 . 11 Under Visibility. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 13 On the View Control bar. elevation markers. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and section lines are now hidden in the view. grids.

18 In the Project Browser.rvt. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.14 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. and click OK. under Elevations. right-click North. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. double-click North. and click Create View Template From View. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. edit the crop region as before. click OK. and click Apply View Template. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 20 Using the same method. right-click East. 16 In the View Templates dialog. click Apply. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 In the New View Template dialog. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. and click OK.

select Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Under View Depth. under Floor Plans. select Level Below (Level 4). 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. select Level Below (Level 4).View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. under Extents. click Edit. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Penthouse. and click Properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Bottom. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Click OK twice. 2 In the Project Browser. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. for Level. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. for View Range. right-click.

and click Properties. under Extents. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. double-click Roof Plan. right-click. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Roof Plan. for Level. for Bottom. for View Range. Under View Depth.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. select Level 4. click Edit. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK twice.

select Unlimited. for Bottom. 16 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. select Unlimited. click Plan Region. Move you cursor diagonally. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . Click OK twice. for Level. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. click Lines. click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch. under Extents. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. select the left endpoint of the outer wall.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. In the left corner of the building. click Edit. for View Range. 10 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). Under View Depth. 11 On the Options Bar.

After you apply the filter. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. expand Floor Plans. the fire rating of the walls. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. and double-click Level 1.17 On the Design Bar. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. in this case. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. click Modify. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click the Filters tab. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

14 In the Color dialog. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Color. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. and click OK. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . and click OK. select Solid Fill. 9 Click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 16 Click OK. Select contains. for Pattern. and click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 5 In the Filters dialog. click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 10 On the Filter tab. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Add. under Basic colors. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog. click <No Override>. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. click Remove. click (New). On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. enter Rated Walls. and click OK. under Projection/Surface. 11 Select Rated Walls. click Override under Patterns. Enter Hr. click Edit/New. under Categories. and apply a color.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Fire Rating. under Filters. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. for Rated Walls. 17 Using the same method. select Walls. select the red color.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Floor Plans. 8 Select the crop region. click Show Crop Region. 5 On the View menu. click Masking Region. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. right-click.rvt. 4 On the View Control Bar. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. select Invisible lines. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 7 On the View menu. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 9 On the View Control Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. 11 In the Type Selector. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename.

14 On the Design Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click (Rectangle). 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.12 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.

right-click. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans. right-click Unit 18 Plan . and click Override. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. select Solid fill.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Walls. click the current scale. for Pattern. click black. click in the Patterns field. and click Rename. under Visibility. 7 Under Cut. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.Level 1. for Color. and click 1: 50. under Pattern Overrides. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 11 Click OK twice. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.

Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Grids. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. clear Floors. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click Modify. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .

20 Right-click. click a purple color. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 23 In the Color dialog. right-click. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK. click <No Override> to apply a color. for Pattern. 25 Click OK twice. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. click Override. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. select the sofa. for Color. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Dash. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. By using the previous method to make the selection. click Projection Lines. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. under Lines.

click By Category Override. 32 Select one of the lamps. 30 On the Design Bar. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. select a bright green color. click Modify.28 For Color. 29 In the Color dialog. right-click. click . Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.33 On the View Control Bar. click . you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click View. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.Creating Sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . select A0 metric. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Sheet.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. right-click. and click OK. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.rvt. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.

Click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . expand Sheets (all).NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Unnamed. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. and select the title block. on the Options Bar. click Modify. enter Site Plan. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 5 When the title block highlights. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. For Sheet Number. click Modify. enter A101.

enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter Freighthouse Flats. under Other. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter J. 2009. For Client Name.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Smith. for Project Address. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. click Edit. enter For Approval. enter 15 May. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 14 Click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter 2009-1. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . For Project Status. For Project Name. For Project Number.

196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Elevations A107 . enter Floor Plan. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Elevations A105 . and click OK.Elevations A106 . and click OK. select A0 metric. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. for Name. right-click.Stairs In the following exercise. and click Rename. and click Save. 17 In the Project Browser. select the new sheet name. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Sections A108 .Layout Plan A104 . you add views to these sheets.rvt.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.

under Sheets (all). under Floor Plans. and drag it to the sheet. select Level 1. double-click A102 . drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. click Modify.Elevations. under Sheets (all). The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Floor Plan. double-click A104 . Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click to place the view. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. The red border around the view no longer displays. 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . under Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt.

198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). 12 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and click to place it. click Modify. align it with the East elevation.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.Sections. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click A107 . click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. and click to place it.

NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. and on the Options Bar. move the cursor over it. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. select 1:5. zoom in to the grip. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and press TAB until it highlights. 16 Select title bar. and click OK. for View Scale. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. .

Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. under Floor Plans. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 18 Under Floor Plans. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. double-click Level 1. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 On the Design Bar. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 21 Zoom to the stair callout.Stairs.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. double-click A108 . and click to place it.

Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. under Sheets (all). 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and then make changes and deactivate the view. click Modify. double-click A107 . enter 16700 mm.Sections.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. In order to do this. 2 Select the building section view. right-click. and click Activate View. you must first activate the view on the sheet.

and click Deactivate View. 7 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Elevations (Building Elevation).6 Right-click. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. double-click North. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.rvt. After you create the sheet. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Camera. enter T. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. The camera view displays. For Sheet Name. and click Properties. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. right-click. 7 Place the camera as shown. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select A0 metric. select the new sheet name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . enter Title Sheet. Click OK.

Under Extents. under Sheets (all). For Target Elevation.8 On the Options Bar. for Eye Elevation.Title Sheet. enter 1500 mm. double-click T . click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 18000 mm. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Far Clip Offset. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 14 Under 3D Views. Click OK. select Far Clip Active. enter 100000 mm. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 13 In the Project Browser. Under Camera.

for Height. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. for Show title. enter 635 mm. under Graphics. 22 In the Name dialog. on the Options Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. click Edit/New. Under Model Crop Size. select Scale (locked proportions). click Size. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.15 With the view selected. select No. enter Viewport/no title mark. 25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 19 Select the view on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 Click OK twice. Click Apply. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. and click OK. click Duplicate. . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 .

and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Tagging Objects In this lesson. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. such as doors and windows. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. 207 . such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. such as room and window schedules. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You also learn to create different types of schedules. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because of the open style floor plan.

2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). click Room Separation. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 5 Using the same method. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor to the right. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click Room and Area.

click Modify. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. click Load. 7 On the Design Bar. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 9 In the Tags dialog.6 Using the same method. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 .

click Room. click OK. and select the room tag.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and the rectangle contains the room tag. The room tag number displays in blue. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Training Files. and press ENTER. type 2400 mm. 11 In the Tags dialog. 14 For Offset. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. indicating that it can be edited. click it. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 13 On the Options Bar. type U18-1. and click to place the room and tag. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

type Entry. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . type Kitchen. Dining. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag. 22 Click the room text label. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Modify. place rooms and tags. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Sequential letters are also supported. 23 Using the same method. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged.18 Click the room text label. and press ENTER. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 19 On the Design Bar. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. click Room.

double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Room Tag.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms.Level 2. expand Lines. and click OK. click Modify. The rooms are already placed. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). and moving clockwise. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. on the Model Categories tab. 27 On the Design Bar. clear Room Separation. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . but they need to be tagged.

Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.rvt. clear Leader.Level 1. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. you learn how to place door and window tags. in the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . 3 On the Options Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. expand Floor Plans. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. click Tag ➤ By Category.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

click New. select Corridor. for Name. For 104. 11 Using the same method. 101-106. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . For 103. type Building Entry. type Corridor. The room Number is U17-46. next to Rows. add 5 more rooms.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. For 105. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. for room 101. type Storage. and press ENTER. For 102. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. select Storage. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and press ENTER.

In the Lines field. click the Lines field. under Floor Plans. click the bright green swatch. click Override. and press ENTER. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 4 Click OK twice. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. For Room Separation. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Lines. In the Line Graphics dialog. select 9. you add room separation lines. under Visibility.rvt. type Stair. and modify room names. 13 Save the file. click the Color field.■ For 106. place rooms from a program list. under Projection/Surface. For Weight. and click OK. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Under Custom colors.

click Room. click Room Separation. First. 9 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. click Modify. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. draw the horizontal line. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 .

select 102 Storage. 11 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 13 On the Options Bar. type 2400 mm.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 14 For Offset. for Room. for Room.

20 While pressing CTRL. under Schedules/Quantities. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). and zoom in to the Corridor. place the following rooms. 19 In the Project Browser. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). 17 On the Design Bar. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. click Modify. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. under Floor Plans. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. double-click Level 1. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . 16 Using the same method. double-click Room Schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101.

27 Select Schedule keys. and click Add. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Base Finish.21 On the Options Bar. Floor Finish. select Rooms. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and for all 3 finishes. click New. type As Selected. under Constraints. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 30 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 31 For Key Name. clear Room Bounding. click 23 On the Design Bar. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. type Units. 24 Open the Room Schedule. and click OK. under Available fields. click Modify. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. for Rows. while pressing CTRL. click Schedule/Quantities. (Element Properties). under Category. and Wall Finish. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. for Fields. and click Add. 43 In the Filter dialog. and click Properties.32 Using the same method. click Edit. for Available fields. 44 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. 38 Under U17-8. and click OK. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. select Units. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 33 In the Project Browser. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. under Floor Plans. 37 Open the Room Schedule. right-click Room Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Units. 42 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. for Room Style. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Filter Selection). double-click Level 1. under Other. 36 Click OK twice. and click OK. click (Element Properties). The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. click Check None. select Room Style.

and click OK. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. click 5 For Title. (Duplicate).46 Open the Room Schedule. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click OK. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. type Room Type. and apply it to the Level 1 view. click the Color Scheme field. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 48 Save the file. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. select Public. 103. and click Properties. for Name. For rooms 102 and 105. under Graphics. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). right-click Level 1. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Service. select Room Style. for Color. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and double-click Level 1. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. under Floor Plans. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. click OK. expand Floor Plans. at the warning prompt. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. and 106. 104.rvt. type Room Type. 9 In the Project Browser.

clear Visible. 14 Click OK twice. click Edit Color Scheme. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Schemes. 17 On the Design Bar. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. under Visibility. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . select the color legend. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. click Color Scheme Legend. click the value in the Color column. click Modify. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and clear Room Separation. select Room Type. 19 On the Options Bar. expand Lines. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Edit.

and click OK. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click OK twice. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 Click OK. type 5 mm. 30 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 23 Using the same method. (Element Properties). select blue. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . respectively. on the Options Bar. for Size. under Custom color. 28 Under Title Text. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. under Graphics.22 In the Color dialog. click Modify. for Swatch Width. type 25 mm.

for Color Scheme. select Room Type. under Graphics. and click OK. 35 Click OK twice. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Color Scheme Legend. double-click Building Section.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. click Edit. right-click Building Section. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. under Visibility. and select Properties. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. under Sections. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance.

for Room Style. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Identity Data. and click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. 45 While pressing CTRL. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. (Filter Selection). and click OK. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click . click Check None. click . and click OK. select all the rooms in the stairwell. select Public. under Identity Data.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). select Units. select Rooms. 41 On the Options Bar.

under Identity Data. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. for Rows. excluding the stairwell spaces. and click OK. select Service. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . and click . click New. type Suites.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. under Schedules/Quantities. 54 While pressing CTRL. 51 On the Options Bar. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. for Room Style. under Key Name for the new row. double-click Room Style Schedule.

under Identity Data. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The color fill extends to the roof.55 Click . Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. under Volume Computations. and click OK. and click OK. for Room Style. select Suites. verify that At wall finish is selected. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. The color fill will extend to the roof. 59 Under Room Area Computation. but not beyond it. select Areas and Volumes. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. select the room on the left side of the top floor.

for Upper Limit. click Modify. 66 Click OK. select Level 2.0. for Upper Limit. type 0. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. the dining room. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 68 Click . type -254 mm. . select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). under Constraints. 70 For Limit Offset. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . and click 65 For Limit Offset. 72 On the Design Bar. select Loft. 71 Click OK. 67 On the first level. select the stairwell room. and the living room.

73 Save the file. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.

add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. and click Add. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. and click OK. click Modify. under Available fields. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. For Then by. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 9 Using the same method. Clear Itemize every instance. click Family and Type. select Roofs. 3 While pressing CTRL. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. select Family and Type. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. select Material: Description.EPDM. Select Grand totals. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. under Category.Insulation on Plywood Deck .

for Material: Cost. click Estimated Cost. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. 17 Click Calculated Value. type Estimated Cost.40 50. under Other. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 23 For Field formatting. click the Formatting tab. click Edit. 21 Click OK. and click Add. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. for Name. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 19 For Type. and click OK twice. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. select Currency. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. under Available fields. 12 Click OK.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. select Material: Cost. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. and under Fields. 20 For Formula. select Calculate totals. Under Field formatting. for Fields. and click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Material: Area. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated.

35 The Estimated cost is calculated. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. not just for currency. tag the line. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. click the Format value. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 28 For Unit symbol. and reporting the shared parameters. 31 Save the file. 30 Click OK twice. ensuring consistency across families and projects. 26 In the Project Units dialog. you create a shared parameter file. regardless of category. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and are defined and stored in an external file. for Rounding. The cost fields are formatted correctly. 27 In the Format dialog. adding the shared parameters to a family. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. can be used for any number-based parameter. In this lesson. 29 Select Use digit grouping. you create an exiting plan for the building. creating a generic tag to tag the family. which inserts commas after every three digits. either within family components or within the project template.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. Digit grouping. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . You draw a travel path line. These shared parameters can be added to any family. select $. and schedule the total distance of each path. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. for Currency. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters.

11 Click OK twice. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. for Name. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. click New. click Create. for Name. type Travel Distance.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for File name. and click Save. and click OK.txt. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 9 Under Parameters. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt.rvt. click New. 7 Under Parameters. under Groups. type Path ID. type Exiting. for Name. select Length. for Type of Parameter. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. click Training Files. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.

13 Click Apply. select Constraints. and click Select. under Parameters. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. type Length. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 15 If necessary. otherwise the family loads into the current project.rfa.rvt. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. in the Load into Projects dialog. click Family Types. group it under Dimensions. 10 Using the same method. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. select Shared parameter.rvt. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 14 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 8 Select Instance. If you have multiple projects open. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . click Load into Projects. click Add. for Travel Distance Formula. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 11 Click OK. under Parameters. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and click OK. and select Instance. Click Training Files. following the equals symbol (=). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. click Add. under Parameter Data. 3 On the Design Bar. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. under Parameter Type. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. for Group parameter under.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file.

and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. select Travel Distance. click Select. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Category Parameters. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Travel Distance. click Label. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Add Parameter). click parameter(s) to label). 24 Click OK twice.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. click Label. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 25 In the Edit Label dialog.rft. click Training Files. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK.

click Modify. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 29 In the drawing window. and move it down. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. click Load into Projects. type M_Travel Distance Tag. for File Name. 32 In the Save As dialog.rvt is selected.28 On the Design Bar. 35 Save the file. and click OK. and press DELETE. 33 On the Design Bar. 31 Click File ➤ Save As.rfa. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. select Path ID. and click Save.

Placing.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. After the lines are tagged. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.Level 1. select Chain. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 6 Move the cursor to the right. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. and click in the center of the corridor.Tagging. 4 On the Options Bar. click Component. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. double-click Exiting Plan . above the exterior door as shown.

18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click (Element Properties). double click Exiting Plan . and click outside of the building. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Component. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. under Floor Plans. verify that Chain is selected.7 Move the cursor down. and click OK. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . move the cursor near the right corner. type 1-1. 8 On the Design Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 13 While pressing CTRL. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. for Path ID. through the door.Tagging. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.Level 2. click Modify. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. Placing. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. under Constraints. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click in the stair. and click above the door to the stair. click Component. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. move the cursor to the left. 21 On the Design Bar. and click. 23 Move the cursor down. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

. 27 On the Design Bar. type 2-1. 33 For Name. type Level 1 Exit Distance. for Path ID. click Modify. click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL.Tagging. under Constraints. 30 Using the same method. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. click Tag ➤ By Category. Placing. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path.24 On the Design Bar. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click OK. under Category. and click OK. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 32 In the New Schedule dialog.

47 In the Element Properties dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance. and click OK. select Travel Distance. type 1-. select Path ID. and under Field formatting.rvt. 43 In the Project Browser. 49 Click OK twice. click Edit. select contains. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. in the second field. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 35 Click the Filter tab. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . in the third field. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. select Calculate totals. and in the third field. 40 Click the Formatting tab. under Available fields. 50 Save the file. and click Rename. 45 In the Rename View dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. while pressing CTRL. select Path ID. 42 Click OK.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. type 2-. and click Add. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. under Other. 38 For Sort by. and click Properties. for Filter by. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. in the first field. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Training Files. 46 In the Project Browser. 41 Under Fields. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 36 For Filter by. for Filter. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. select Path ID and Travel Distance. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.

Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . and click View. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Fixed Partitions. and click OK. and select C1010145 . click Schedule/Quantities.Partitions . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. under Categories. select the following fields. for Assembly Code. under Identity Data. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. click the Fields tab. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the schedule. right-click Generic . right-click the Design Bar. select Walls. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 9 Click OK twice. click the Value field. expand C . 2 In the New Schedule dialog.152 mm.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Interiors ➤ C10 . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . 4 Under Available fields. and click . and click Properties.

the database display may be different than that shown. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. select a location for the database file. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. and click Next. click OK. and click OK to create the database.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Create. 1 On the File menu. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.11 Close the exercise file. 3 Click New.mdb). 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. click Training Files. type Revit_Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the New Database dialog. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Database Name. 9 Under Directories. 11 Click OK 3 times. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 6 Click Finish. click the File Data Source tab.mdb. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. and click Next. under Database.

Additionally. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. For example. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. in addition to the Id column. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. 13 Close the exercise file. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category.

262 .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 263 . You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

Detailing 7 In this tutorial. you trace over the building model geometry. plywood. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and metal studs. In the callout view. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. 297 . like a standard door header condition. add detail components. In order to detail from the building model. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. These components display at the required scale.

Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 7 In the drawing area. After you add components. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. The roof overhang detail displays. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. click Detail Component. 5 In the alert dialog. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and insulation objects. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. You load detail components. click Training Files. double-click the detail callout head. and click OK. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. Exact location is not important. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. which means that all detail components. as well as detail lines. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. They are also view specific. you detail the view of the roof edge. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. region objects.Detailing the View In this exercise. and click Open. select As underlay.rvt.

5mm. Detailing the View | 299 . You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Repeating Detail. and click OK. 15 For Spacing. select Corrugated Metal.8 Delete the component. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Edit/New. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 406. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 17 In the drawing area. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click Duplicate. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 16 Click OK twice.

22 On the Options Bar. click Load.rfa. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click (Move). click Detail Component. 24 In the Type Selector.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and click Open. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. click Training Files. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 33 In the Type Selector. and click Open. 29 On the Design Bar. click OK. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. click Detail Component. 30 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. you load them as a group from a single file. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 31 To properly orient the component. and place it in the detail view as shown. click Training Files. Detailing the View | 301 . Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.Because you still have several components to load. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.rvt.

37 Click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows. 38 Select the horizontal segment. and click Modify. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 35 On the Options Bar.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. select Chain. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm.

Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 42 Click Modify. as shown. ■ Click Modify. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. select to near side.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 303 . click Detail Component. enter 140mm. For Offset. click Insulation. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 47 In the Type Selector. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. you add lines to your detail. 2 In the Type Selector.45 In the Type Selector. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. they are view specific. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. as shown. meaning they display only in this view. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. and lock the component. Like detail components. click Detail Lines. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 51 Click Modify. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm.

enter 10mm. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. enter 10mm. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component.4 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. For Offset. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. select Thin Lines. and press ENTER. For Offset. 10 On the Design Bar. as shown. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . as shown. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. 11 In the Type Selector.

click (Draw). 16 On the Options Bar.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. as shown. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. select Chain. and draw the detail lines as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and clear Chain.

19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Properties. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. 24 On the View Control Bar.18 In the Type Selector. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. For Offset. enter 10mm. select Do not display. 22 In the Project Browser. When you turn the display model off. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. Click (Pick Lines). select the Penthouse level line. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. draw the detail lines as shown. right-click. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select Thin Lines. and click OK. and press ENTER. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. 26 In the Type Selector. select Vapor Barrier. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click Detail Lines.

Adding Text Notes In this exercise. select M_Break Line. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 30 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 32 Click Modify. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component.29 On the Design Bar. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. you add text notes to complete the detail. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. press SPACEBAR as necessary.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click Dimension. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click Text.rvt. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 2 On the Options Bar. Enter the text. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 6 Click Modify.

and click the dimension text. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes.. enter Typ. click Roof Overhang Detail. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog.rvt. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.Keynotes. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click OK. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . (Filter Selection). Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Select All Instances. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and press DELETE. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. under Text Fields. select a text note. Creating Detail Components on page 310. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. right-click. on the Options Bar. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click 6 In the Filter dialog. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. for Suffix. right-click. and save the exercise file.7 Select the dimension line. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and click OK.

rft. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component.7 Click Modify. click Training Files. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. while pressing CTRL. select all the coping linework. select Medium Lines. and selecting the chain. 14 Click Modify. in the Type Selector. and click Open. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 16 Click Modify. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. pressing TAB.

Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The original linework remains selected. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. click Load. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . clear Detail Items. 26 Press DELETE. click . 27 On the Design Bar. 31 Using the same method used previously. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Keynotes on page 312. and click OK. select the coping.Keynotes view is not the open view. click Detail Component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and the component can be placed in the detail. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. for File name. 25 In the Filter dialog. 28 On the Options Bar. navigate to your preferred location. double-click it in the Project Browser. 24 On the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. 30 In the drawing area. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 21 To place the component. and click Save. you place keynotes on objects. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. While pressing SHIFT. 23 Using a window. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter Roof Edge. delete the underlying linework. click Detail Component.18 In the Save As dialog. and click Open. 22 Click Modify.rfa.

19mm Plywood. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.C1. and click OK. 2 In the alert dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. use keynote 06160. 63mm Rigid Insulation. Click to place the leader arm. Roof Edge4. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click Modify. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. use keynote 07645. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. In the Keynotes dialog. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. For the metal coping. and click Open. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Keynote ➤ Element. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. Adding Keynotes | 313 .rvt. click Training Files. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.B5.rfa. (Element Properties). select the metal fascia with drip edge.D11.

F1.G1. click Detail Component. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. For the 50 x 300. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click in the Value column. 22mm Corrugated Steel . 15 In the Type Selector. For the 50 x 200. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. use keynote 06160. You do this in order to keynote the component.A8.F1. navigate to 07645. use keynote 09250. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. and click . you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.I1. use keynote 06110. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 11 Click OK 3 times. For the 50 x 150. use keynote 06110.20 Ga. 17 Keynote the component. FasciaProfile_1. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. use keynote 06110. using keynote 07460.D11. 18 Save the file.9 In the Type Properties dialog. select Corrugated Metal. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . For the 19mm Plywood Siding.D1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.

24 While pressing CTRL. click Duplicate. select Medium Lines. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Open. for File name. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Click OK 3 times. 13 In the Type Selector.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 5 In the drawing area. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. select Medium Line Detail Component. and click Modify. click Edit/New. and click (Element Properties). The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 9 On the Design Bar. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 19 In the Name dialog. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Detail Component. click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 15 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. click Lines.rft. click Load into Projects. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 22 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Open. click Training Files. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select the right end point. 6 Lock the line. 11 Press DELETE. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Save. click Load. select the left end point of the reference line. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 16 Select the component.

34 In the Name dialog. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light.25 Next. invisible. 28 In the Type Selector. 38 On the Design Bar. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. click Duplicate. 42 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. 30 Click Modify. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 48 Using the same method used previously. and click . and assign it keynote 06110. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. name the component Air Barrier. and click . click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. select m_Light Line Detail Component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.A5. 47 Select the component. and click the lower end at the break line. click (Move). 29 In the drawing area. and click . 35 In the Type Properties dialog. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and hidden) used in the view. 41 Select the component just added. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 31 Select the component. against the 19mm plywood. enter EPDM Membrane. 49 With the component selected. 37 Click OK 3 times. click in the Value column. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. and click OK. and assign it keynote 07260. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. click Edit/New. on the Edit toolbar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 46 Click Modify.A1. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 36 In the Keynotes dialog.G1. and click . 44 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 40 Click Modify. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang.

Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 52 In the Type Selector. 53 On the Options Bar. 55 Click Modify. and click . select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. select Chain. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. leaving the detail component lines. click Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 .

66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63 In the drawing area.rfa. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. select the component. 50 x 200 Framing. and assign it keynote 07260. and Vapor Barrier. 68 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. click Load into Projects. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rfa.A4. Air Barrier. in the Type Selector. select Invisible Lines. 61 In the drawing area. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.58 Using the method used previously. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. click Keynote ➤ Element. 60 On the Design Bar. name the component Vapor Barrier. 67 In the Type Selector. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component.

click Browse. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. 71 In the drawing area.69 Select the component. add a keynote for the component. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. under Keynote Table. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. The database file opens in a text editor. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. name the component Batt Insul. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. and assign it keynote 07210.rvt. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 07460. and click . and press TAB. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and press TAB.. 72 Save the file.txt. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.A1. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . click File menu ➤ Save. and close the text editor. 70 Using the method used previously. Enter 07463. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and press ENTER. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. 3 In the text editor. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric.A4.A9.

navigate to 07463.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.A1. 13 Click Modify. 11 Click Modify. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. under Path Type. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. and click to place the note. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. In the Type Selector. Each keynote displays as a simple number. After you create a drafting view. click to place the leader. These details do not update with changes to the building model. and click Open. and click OK. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). you learn how to create a drafted detail. click Keynote ➤ Element. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. select Absolute. select all the keynotes. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 9 In the drawing area.txt. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. and click OK. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 14 Save the file.

Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. The detail that you import is in DWG format.dwg. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. verify that Auto . The detail is imported as an import symbol. select 1 : 5. select Black and White. Click Open. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 7 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. For Colors. for Scale. and click OK. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. right-click Drafting 1.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. click Training Files. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.Center to Center is selected. and click Rename. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. For Positioning.rvt. and click OK. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).

enter Detail . 3 On the Options Bar. click Callout. select Reference other view. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. click Edit/New.No Reference. click Rename. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 5 Click Modify. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. for New. delete the existing value. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. and click OK. 6 Select the callout. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 12 Click OK twice. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Properties. 10 In the Rename dialog.

Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.No Reference). There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 ./Sect.Elev. and double-click the callout. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . you create a door head condition in the new drafting view./Det. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. The callout is updated with the sheet information. double-click A105 . 18 Save the file.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board.rvt. 5 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. for Name. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. click Edit/New. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Name. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Board. enter Header @ Sliding Door. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. and click OK. select Gypsum-Plaster.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. 11 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 14 Click OK 3 times. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. . click Region Properties. enter Gyp. click Filled Region. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Duplicate.

and enter 20. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 17 Click Modify.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 18 While pressing CTRL. click 22 On the Options Bar.5mm. click . Draw a rectangle as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . select Wide Lines. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. select the width dimension. 20 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. (Mirror). and on the Edit toolbar. click (Draw). 16 Select the left edge of the region. 19 In the Type Selector.

326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 33 Click OK 3 times. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Wood . 24 Select the mirrored region. and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Move the cursor up. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 25 Click Modify.Finish. click Region Properties. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. for Name. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Filled Region.Finish. click Duplicate. 30 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. enter Wood .23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.

sketch the new region as shown. verify that the thickness is 19mm. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . 38 On the Design Bar. click (Align). click Finish Sketch. 37 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. select Medium Lines. click . and select the right edge of the wood region. select Medium Lines. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 39 In the Type Selector. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click (Rectangle). Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.5mm. click Filled Region. Draw a rectangle as shown.

Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Finish Sketch. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click 48 Click Modify. (Align). 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Filled Region. For Offset. and press ENTER. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 46 On the Tools toolbar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. and press ENTER.42 On the Design Bar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Ref Plane. 47 Click the reference plane. enter 6mm.

54 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor left 25mm. and click to select the point. and select the bottom horizontal line. Move the cursor down 305mm. Select Chain.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Move the cursor right 25mm. click (Trim/Extend). enter 0. 56 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and click to select the point. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . For Offset. and click to select the point. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line.

Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 68 Click Modify. For Offset. top. 61 Click Modify.2mm. 60 Select the left. and click Open. and right edges of the door panel region. select the height dimension. enter 76. enter 3mm. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. click Detail Lines. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 65 On the Options Bar. 69 Select the bolt. 58 In the Type Selector. 62 Select the left detail line. click Training Files. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and press ENTER. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. click Load. click Detail Component.

72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. click Detail Lines. 71 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. use the images as a guide. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 76 In the Type Selector.70 On the Design Bar. and click Open. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Load. click Detail Component. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. select Wide Lines. 74 Select the expansion bolt.

79 In the Type Selector. 84 On the Design Bar. 87 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 80 On the Options Bar.78 On the Design Bar. click . click Detail Lines. (Mirror). select Thin Lines. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 85 On the Options Bar. click . 82 Select the rectangle. and on the Edit toolbar.

and on the Edit toolbar. 89 On the Design Bar. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 90 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 .88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 92 Select the line. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click (Mirror). 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. as shown.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 97 On the Options Bar. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 102 In the Type Selector. select M_Break Line. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. and press ENTER. enter 3mm. click . click Detail Lines. click Detail Component. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 103 Add two break lines as shown. select the length dimension. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click to place the arc as shown. 99 Click Modify. 95 On the Design Bar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 101 On the Design Bar.

select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. and click Modify. 108 In the Type Selector. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 105 In the drawing area. click Dimension. 106 Click to place the dimension. drag the text for the smaller dimension.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar.5mm Arial. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. click Dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . 110 Select the dimension line. and click Modify. 107 On the Design Bar. using the Drag Text grip.

and enter Varies. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. and then click the dimension text. 113 Under Text Fields. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. for Below. 118 Select Modify to end the command. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . under Dimension Value. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. enter See Schedule. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types.5mmArial. 114 Click OK. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Replace With Text. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. and click the dimension text. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown.2. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. click Dimension.

123 Click OK. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. select the gypsum board region on the left. 128 Select the note. click Text. and on the Options Bar. click to create an arced leader. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 127 Enter Gyp. Board.121 Click OK. and click to place the text. 125 In the Options Bar. and click Modify. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. 126 In the drawing area. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

click Modify to end the command. 132 Save the file.131 On the Design Bar. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. click Training Files. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click East. 339 . Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Number of Leaders. type 1. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify.rfa. click Symbol. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.Hexagon. click Training Files. 8 Select the keynote. 5 On the Options Bar. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 7 On the Design Bar.

on the Options Bar. under Identity Data. click (Element Properties). Creating a Note Block | 341 . 12 On the Edit toolbar. click (Copy). and click above the tag to place the copy.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. for Text. type Seal existing doors and insulate. 13 Select the tag. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

and click. on the Edit toolbar. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 16 For Tag. click Copy. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. type Repair existing door surround. 19 With the tag selected. 15 For Text.14 With the copy selected. on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. (Mirror). type B. click (Element Properties). position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 18 Using the same method. 17 Click OK. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

Clean exterior brick wall. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. 22 Optionally. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . and moving counter-clockwise.21 On the Design Bar. Tuckpoint as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Repair existing door surround. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Remove all existing windows. Repair as required. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. click Modify. using the table as a reference.

Create. and click Add. On the Appearance tab. verify that Arial is selected. under Available fields. 27 In the column header (text). type Exterior Construction Notes. select Center. and select Bold. for Header text. and click Add. for the value. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Tag. select Tag. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. 29 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. On the Formatting tab. and double-click A103 . 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. type Description. type 6 mm. and for Alignment. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . expand Sheets (all). 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. format. for Sort by. Clean cut and repair wall as required. 28 In the Project Browser.Elevations.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. for Heading. select Exterior Construction Notes. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. for Note block name. 26 Click OK. and click OK. type Mark. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. Select Text.

31 On the Design Bar. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.rvt.rvt. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. double-click T .

in the first field. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. On the Filter tab. select does not equal. type T. in the second field. expand Schedules/Quantities.Title Sheet. ■ 4 Click OK. under Sheets (all). On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. 5 In the list title field. and click Add. The drawing list displays. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and in the third field. for Filter by.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select Sheet Number. and drag it to the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click T . select Sheet Number. under Available fields. for Sort by. Select Sheet Name. and click Add. 7 In the Project Browser.

and door frames. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. and so on). you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. doors. Finally. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. On construction documents. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. windows. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project.9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 11 Save the file. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Training File Using Legends | 347 . and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. For the text. door frame schedule. On construction documents. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference.

Open Level Head . for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. type 3mm. click Duplicate. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. and click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . click Edit/New. type Typical Symbol Legend. select Arial. 10 For Text Size. and click OK twice. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. click Text.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type Legend Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Symbol. for Name. and click OK. you create a text type with the necessary size.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 9 For Text Font.

click Typical Symbol Legend. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. and for Leader. 14 Working from the top down. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . expand Sheets (all). verify that is selected. expand Legends.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and click to place it. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and double-click A101 .Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser.

select Viewport : No Titlemark. and click to place it. 18 On the Design Bar.17 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 Save the file. click Modify. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 21 In the Type Selector. double-click A102 . click Modify.Unit 18. select Viewport : No Titlemark. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.

You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. select 1 : 50. For Host length. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. and click OK.rvt. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 5 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . select Medium for Detail Level. click Legend Component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Section. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type 900 mm. for Name. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. For View. and press ENTER. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 3 For Scale. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and on the Options Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 10 Select the second wall. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.9 On the Design Bar. for Leader. click to add text without a leader. click Text. click Modify. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 13 On the Options Bar. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. for Family. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.

click OK to accept the default titleblock. and drag it to the new sheet. click to add text with a single-segment leader. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . 23 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 19 Type the following text. The text note with leader is added to the legend. right-click Sheets (all). pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. and click New Sheet. under Floor Plans.

Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. under Legends. click Modify to end the command. double-click Level 4. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 29 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. drag it onto the sheet. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select 4th Floor Wall Types. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.25 In the Project Browser. The open drawings are both visible. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 26 On the Design Bar.

32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. select the Wall Type 2 component. 33 In the floor plan view. select Detail Level: Medium. click (Match Type).Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 35 On the View Control Bar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . 34 Select the patio divider wall.

36 Optionally. double-click Level 4. click 37 Save the file. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. or changes in building material availability. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. You can create a sequence of revisions. contractor inquiries. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . These changes can be due to owner requests.rvt. Using the table. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. In general. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. If you select Per Sheet. When Issued is selected. For example. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. If Visible is not selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. for Numbering. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . yet as concise as possible. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. 5 For Description. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. In most instances. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. if the active revision is number 1. 7 Under Show. the revision is locked and issued to the field. type a date. verify that Per Project is selected. When you use this option.

Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the divider. move the cursor up. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 9 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Revision clouds have read-only properties.8 Click OK. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you make changes to the project floor plan. 3 Select the divider. including revision number and revision date. double-click Level 4. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. click (Move). You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt.

Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. select Snaps Off. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. In the Snaps dialog. click Revision Cloud. click Finish Sketch. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click near the partition you moved. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 8 In the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 .

14 In the Object Styles dialog. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 17 Save the file. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 16 Click OK. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. you load a revision tag into the project. select 6. click the Annotation Objects tab.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. for Line Weight. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.

which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. click Training Files. 10 In the drawing area. click OK. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. you need to add one. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tags.rfa. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Because you chose to number by project. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 6 Click Load. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 11 Click to place the tag. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . you create additional revisions in the revision table. and because the revision is the first in the project. click Tag ➤ By Category. scroll down to Revision Clouds. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. select Leader. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 8 In the Tags dialog. double-click Level 4.rvt. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. under Floor Plans. You then issue a revision. 12 Save the file. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 5 In the Tags dialog.

2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. with the description Relocate Door. type Modify Paving Area. You do this by issuing the revision.rvt.Unnamed. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and enter a date for the revision. you can no longer modify it. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. click Add. double-click A107 . and click OK. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 9 Click OK. 8 Add another revision row. under Sheets. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. and enter a date. 7 For Description. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. you prevent further changes to the revision. You can continue to add revisions. NOTE After you issue a revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. select Issued.

under Floor Plans.Unnamed. in the drawing area. under Sheets (all). 3 . click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. select Revision Cloud. 12 In the drawing area. 11 On the Drafting tab. click to add a revision clouds. 19 To add tags. 20 On the Project Browser. 2 . double-click A107 .Relocate Door to the revision cloud. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 17 Using the same method learned previously. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. select Tag ➤ By Category. for Revision. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock.Modify Paving Area. Working with Revisions | 363 . double-click Level 4.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. select the revision cloud. apply Seq. 10 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. select Seq. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule.

25 Click OK twice. You do this so that the revision can be changed. clear Issued. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. select the titleblock. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. For each revision. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. for Sequence. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. Click Options. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 26 In the drawing area. and rotation) to the revision schedule. beginning with "D". height. for Numbering. select Alphabetic. delete the first 3 characters.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. you edit the titleblock family. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

right-click Revision Schedule. under Other. Select Grid lines. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. Clear Blank row before data. 28 In the alert dialog. 34 On the Design Bar. for Build Schedule. select Bottom-up. click Edit. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. 33 Select the schedule header. and drag it above the schedule area. click Load into Projects. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. click Yes. for Appearance. and click Properties. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built.27 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. Working with Revisions | 365 . Select Outline. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. click Edit Family. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. click Modify. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. click Yes. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area.

45 On the Appearance tab.. and on the Options Bar. for Heading. open the titleblock family for editing. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. under Other. With a user-defined height. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. for Height. and click Properties. 40 Select the revision schedule header. for Rotation on Sheet. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. for Formatting. select User defined. enter Rev. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. select 90° Counterclockwise. right-click Revision Schedule. select the revision schedule. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. When the height property is variable. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. click Edit.

The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. text. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . click Load into Projects. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Yes. you learn to import information (such as images.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. double-click T . click to add text without a leader. double-click T . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. click Training Files. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Title Sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. for Leader.Title Sheet. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Modify. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. under Sheets. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. under Sheets. and place it on a sheet.Importing Image Files In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Text. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.JPG. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the text. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . click Modify. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.doc text file in another window. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 11 Save the file. with the new text box still selected. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.

mdi. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. for File name. for Name. This process may vary from system to system.JPG. 5 Click OK. double-click A102 . Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. click Training Files.rvt.JPG. click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. This exercise demonstrates a common method. This step has been completed for you. 12 Save the file. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.Unit 18. and click Save. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. select the document writer. under Sheets. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 10 On the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Print. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Desktop. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format.xls. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. type Fixture Schedule. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 4 Under Printer.

for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. as well as a large lab building. 371 . The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. The large floor plan. called dependent views.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. or footprint. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. you break up the plan into sections. To effectively document this project.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.

6 In the drawing area. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 5 Click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. for Name. right-click Level 2. double-click Level 2. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2.Aviary. under Level 2. under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 . 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. select the crop region. click Zoom To Fit. The dependent view opens.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . 9 On the View Control Bar.8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). click (Hide Crop Region).

13 In the Rename View dialog. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). enter Level 2 . 15 Select the crop region. and click Rename. and click OK. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and on the Zoom flyout. and on the Zoom flyout. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .10 Click in the drawing area.Labs. 12 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 11 In the Project Browser. for Name. right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. 14 Click in the drawing area.

19 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. double-click Level 2. click Matchline.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . under Floor Plans. 20 Click in the drawing area. click Modify.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. 18 On the Design Bar.

378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Click above the left corner of the lab building. click Finish Sketch. 24 On the Design Bar.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm.

34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. expand Sheets. 28 For Line Pattern. for Line Weight. enter Level 2 Aviary. click Level 2 . and drag it onto the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click Rename. click the Annotation Objects tab. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . select 9. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. select Double Dash.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. right-click A101 . 31 In the Project Browser. for Name.Unnamed. 33 In the Project Browser.Aviary. 27 Under Matchline. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.

380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 39 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . for Target view.Aviary is selected. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser.35 On the Design Bar. click View Reference. and place the Level 2 . 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. under Floor Plans.

select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Zoom flyout. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 41 On the Options Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit. for Target view. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.Labs.

48 Select the crop region. double-click Level 2 . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 47 On the View Control Bar. 49 If. click the far right control. after modifying the annotation crop region.46 In the Project Browser. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. right-click. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.Aviary. under Floor Plans. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. click (Show Crop Region).

New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 52 In the Project Browser. 53 In the Select Views dialog. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). 54 In the Project Browser. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . select all views in the list. 55 On the Zoom flyout. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. but are not placed on sheets. and click OK. expand Level 1. right-click Level 2. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). and click Apply Dependent Views. under Floor Plans. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 51 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. click Zoom To Fit.

rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .57 On the Zoom flyout. right-click South Elevation. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Zoom To Fit. click Training Files. and double-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The matchline is already placed in the view.

cropping the view to the aviary. click (Hide Crop Region). 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right.The dependent view opens. cropping the view to the lab building. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 5 In the drawing area. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. expand South Elevation. enter South Elevation . for Name. 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click South Elevation. and click Rename. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter South Elevation .Left. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Rename. select the Crop Region. 7 On the View Control Bar. and drag it toward the center of the view.Right. 11 Select the crop region. for Name. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and click OK.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . click Modify.15 On the Design Bar.

Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. The perspective view displays. click Camera.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. on the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.

in the Project Browser. With the camera shown. and select the crop boundary. as shown. under Floor Plans. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. as necessary. and click Show Camera. right-click 3D View 1. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. Depending on camera placement. double-click Site. If the camera is not shown in the view. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. and adjust the field of vision. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser.3 Zoom out.

double-click Exterior . enter Exterior . 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. and click Rename. right-click 3D View 1. 10 Save the file.Day to open the view. under 3D Views. 7 In the Rename View dialog.6 In the Project Browser.Day. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. and click OK. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Project Browser.

and render a daytime view of the exterior.rvt.Day. under 3D Views. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. You then duplicate the view. modify render settings. double-click Exterior . Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.

select Spring Equinox. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. You create a location and time for the rendering. select Edit/New. 8 Under Quality. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. and click Render. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Sun.Santa Monica. click (Show Rendering Dialog). for Setting. 3 In the Rendering dialog. You adjust cloud settings as required.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Rendering dialog. 3pm. enter Spring Equinox . 5 In the Rename dialog. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. NOTE If a background image is required. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. 6 Click OK twice. select Sky: Cloudy. select Medium. under Background. under Lighting. and click Rename. for New. In this case.

png). 13 Close the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Desktop. click Show the rendering. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. click Show the model.9 In the Rendering dialog. Click Save. After the image is rendered. click Export. For Files of type. 10 In the Rendering dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. select Portable Network Graphics (*.

and select the last light. you duplicate the view and change the settings. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. click OK. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 16 With the Exterior . Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.Flat Round : 60W . To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.Day view to Exterior .120V through 14 :Sconce Light . To select a sequential list. 25 Using the same method. add 30 :Sconce Light . click New.Night view open. verify that Pool Lights is selected. press and hold SHIFT. 27 In the Rendering dialog. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.120V to the Pool Lights group. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . under 3D Views.Night. for Scheme. under Ungrouped Lights. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.Flat Round : 60W . 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. select the first light. under Group Options.Night. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Exterior . dialog. for Name. select Exterior: Artificial only. under Lighting. and click OK. enter Pool Lights. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . and click OK. under Ungrouped Lights.Flat Round : 60W .120V. and click Artificial Lights. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights .Flat Round : 60W . and click Move to Group. click Render. click New. click Dialog).Day. and click OK. 22 Using the same method.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . for Name. under Group Options. enter Pool House Lights. right-click Exterior . on the View Control Bar. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.

under Image. for Exposure Value. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. enter 4. you change the brightness of the exposure. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. click Adjust Exposure. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . Rendering an Interior View on page 411. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 32 Save the file. click Show the model. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. After the image is rendered. In this example. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. and click OK. 30 In the Rendering dialog.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. the exposure can be modified to improve the output.

412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. define the perspective view and rendering settings.rvt. c_Pool_House_in_progress. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. render the views. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. and finally.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view.

and on the Edit toolbar. ■ (Rotate). 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Exact placement is not important. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. under Floor Plans. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. Adding RPC People | 413 . click Component. the person’s line of sight. 6 Select the figure. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. click Modify. select RPC Female : YinYin. and place the component inside the pool house.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1.

for Render Appearance Properties. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. click Edit/New. you can enable this option. 12 Click OK 3 times. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. By default. click Edit. select Cast Reflections. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. on the Options Bar. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. click (Element Properties). 14 Save the file. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. In order to see the figure’s reflection. under Identity Data. 13 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering.

Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.

right-click 3D View 1. and click OK.The perspective view displays. and click Properties. under 3D Views. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Extents. select Section Box. 4 In the Project Browser.

you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. under Elevations (Building Elevations).7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. In order to accurately adjust the section box. double-click Level 1. 11 In the 3D view. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. in addition to the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. select the section box. double-click South.

right-click. 13 In the South Elevation view. select the section box. size the box as shown.12 In the floor plan view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 14 In the 3D view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . size the box as shown.

and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 17 Save the file. doors that contain windows or glass.15 Maximize the 3D view. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and render the interior view. and curtain walls. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . To create a daytime view. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419.

2 In the Rename View dialog.rvt.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Click Artificial Lights. right-click 3D View 1. 3 On the View Control Bar. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. 4 In the Rendering dialog. clear Pool Lights. click Render. and click OK. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. you turn them off for this scene. and click Rename. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. enter Interior . select Draft. You can specify a lower quality. After these settings are established. and click OK. under Lighting. 7 Under Quality. for Setting. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Interior: Artificial only. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 8 In the Rendering dialog. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level.Night. for Scheme. under 3D Views. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. click Copy To Custom. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . You create a view for the interior during the day. in order to turn on daylight portals. For more information on daylight portals. By default they are turned off. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. For sunlit interiors. In this case. select Curtain Walls. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. and click Render. select Region. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. click 14 For Setting. for Daylight Portal Options. the daylight portals can be turned on. 17 In the Rendering dialog. 13 In the Rendering dialog. The preset schemes are read-only. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. select Interior: Sun only. you must create a custom setting. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . select Spring Equinox . (Show Rendering Dialog).9 Close the Rendering dialog.Night. but the space will receive standard daylighting.Day. 3pm. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Santa Monica. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. select Edit. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. right-click Interior . for Sun. for Scheme.

Click OK. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. enter 10. click Adjust Exposure. and on the Options Bar. select the column on the right. For Saturation. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. In the next steps. enter 1. click Properties). 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value.18 In the Rendering dialog. and close the Rendering dialog. under Image. click Show the model. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. 20 In the Rendering dialog.

under Output Settings. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 30 In the drawing area. 24 In the Materials dialog. and click Render. As size and DPI are increased. 29 In the Rendering dialog. the render time increases significantly. click the dimensions for Size. enter 90. 32 In the Rendering dialog. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column.22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Wood. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Unfinished. select Scale (locked proportions). add a bump map to create texture. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. select Printer. Click OK. click OK. For Amount. enter 5''. select the crop boundary. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. For Bump. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . for Setting. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. You change the varnish setting. select High. select Based on wood grain. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 23 With the column still selected.6. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. For Width. For Rotate. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. clear Region. for Resolution. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 26 Click Update Preview.

and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. In a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. Usually. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. independent of the Revit Architecture software.The rendered image displays. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. or section view. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. The walkthrough path is a spline. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. but you can also define it in a 3D. elevation. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. expand Views (all). You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . proceeds through the dining room. verify that Perspective is selected. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. If you prefer to use metric values. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and change unit formats as desired. and ends in the far corner of the living room. click Walkthrough. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. click Settings ➤ Project Units. on the Options Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. and open Common\c_Townhouse.rvt. and double-click 1st Floor. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room.

Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. click Finish. on the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room.

17 Click . The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). on the Options Bar. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 12 On the View menu. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. for Width. 11 Under Change. select the crop boundary. and for Height. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. and select the crop boundary. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). for Frame. verify that Field of view is selected. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. enter 9''. enter 16''. enter 1. click the dimensions for Size. 14 Click . and click OK. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. If it is not. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . click Edit Walkthrough.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips.

Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. click (Element Properties). c_Townhouse. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. under Extents. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.The walkthrough plays. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. press ESC. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 2 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Floor. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. click Edit Walkthrough. clear Far Clip Active. and click OK.rvt. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. under Floor Plans.

You can move any camera target or key frame position. 6 On the Options Bar. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. for Controls. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. select Path. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and drag it to the location shown. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . 7 Click the third key frame position.

8 If you want to save this exercise. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. and click OK. for Compressor. When you export the walkthrough. double-click Walkthrough 1. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. for Frames/sec. hidden line. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. or rendering. 9 To play the walkthrough. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. select <Shading>. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. reducing the size of the image. shading with edges. click File menu ➤ Save As. specifying the number of frames.rvt. c_Townhouse. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. If you are unsure of what option to use. click Edit Walkthrough. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 3 Under Format. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. under Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. shading. under Output Length. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. enter 15. for Model Graphics Style. and click OK.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. The walkthrough is recorded. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save.

In this tutorial. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. 431 . You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. More specifically. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs.

click Training Files.rvt. as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. A 3D view is created. (SteeringWheels). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating a Solar Study .Courtyard View In this exercise. and double-click 01 Entry. click shown. 4 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. expand Views (all). 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. 1 In the Project Browser. click Camera. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement.

click Section. if necessary. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . double-click 01 Entry. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 On the File menu. expand 3D Views. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. right-click 3D View 1. you create a section cutaway view. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. Create section 1 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View. under Floor Plans. enter Solar Study . 3 On the Design Bar. click Save As. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Modify.5 On the Design Bar. and click Rename.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. as shown. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view.

click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. right-click Section 1. (SteeringWheels). enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 11 On the SteeringWheel. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. double-click the section head. 7 In the Project Browser. as shown.5 On the Design Bar. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand Sections. 13 On the Design Bar. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 6 To view the section. and click OK. click . and click Rename. click Modify. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. click Modify. click 10 On the View toolbar.

17 To hide the section box. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 18 On the File menu. right-click {3D}. and click OK. click Save. 4 In the Project Browser. including the house. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . click Callout. clear Section Boxes. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. In some cases.14 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 16 On the View Control Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. 6 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. click . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. as shown. do not display many elements in 3D. you create a plan cutaway view. 15 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. under 3D Views. and click OK. Typical plan views. and click OK. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. double-click 01 Entry. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. then select Medium. then Fine. 5 In the Project Browser.

9 On the SteeringWheel. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). 16 On the View Control Bar. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. as shown. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.8 On the View toolbar. so you can see into the building from the top. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 15 Select the Roof. as shown.

and click OK. under 3D Views. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. 19 In the Rename View dialog. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. click Save. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. under 3D Views. 21 On the File menu. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . 18 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . and preview the effects of each study as an animation.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial.17 On the View Control Bar. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. right-click {3D}.

Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. For the Single-Day solar study. and click Duplicate. select Los Angeles. and click OK. single-day. For this study. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. enter Summer Solstice. MA. 9 In the Name dialog. date.Boston. you specify the location. You can create a still. expand 3D Views. for City. and time. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and time range. date range. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. click click OK.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. or multi-day solar study. you specify the location. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. click . 3 Select Cast Shadows. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. Click the Single-Day tab. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. expand Views (all). 4 For Sun Position. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. Los Angeles. CA. USA. 10 Under Place. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays.Creating Solar Studies . . leave the slider at 50. For the Multi-Day solar study. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. USA is selected. click .

click .Courtyard View is currently displayed.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Los Angeles is selected. Under Frame. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. click . Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Winter Solstice. enter 20 and press ENTER. for Date. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. click Save. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 2008. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles. under Frame.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 16 In the Name dialog. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 19 On the File menu. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click Duplicate. 14 In this case. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. ■ For Time Interval. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 7 On the Options Bar. select December 22. For Time Range. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. select June 22. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. click OK. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. enter 10 and press ENTER. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. for Sun Position. and click OK. enter Winter Solstice. on the Single-Day tab. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. confirm that Summer Solstice. 2008.

11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select Summer Solstice. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View Control Bar. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. . click To play the animation from start to finish. and click OK. The solar study animation plays. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click . Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. under Floor Plans. for Sun Position. click . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. on the Single-Day tab. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click . PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. . Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click To display the next sequential frame. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. click Text.■ To display the next key frame. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Los Angeles. approximately as shown. click OK. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

8 For Sun Position.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. On the Options Bar. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. as shown. Click and enter Dining. click Lines. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. approximately as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 6 On the View Control Bar. expand 3D Views. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. as shown. click . NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 5 In the Project Browser. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . click .

NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. click OK. clear Section Boxes. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. and enter 5 to 50. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. select Section Boxes. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . on the Single-Day tab. select Summer Solstice. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. if necessary. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. Los Angeles. 12 In the drawing area. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. 11 To display the section box. and click OK. under Output Length. select Frame Range. ■ For Frames per second. as shown. select the section box. 15 To hide the section box. and click OK. 14 Click outside of the section box.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.

The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. for Compressor. or frame. select Frame Range. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Dimensions. click . For Files of Type. of the animation separately. enter 450 in the first field (width). 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for Model Graphics Style.■ ■ Under Format. and enter 5 to 10. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. click OK. for Model Graphics Style. For File Name. select AVI Files. and click OK. verify that Hidden Line is selected. on the Single-Day tab. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. Under Format. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . To view the animation. Click OK. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. For Frames per second. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. under Output Length. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you open each image. 2 On the View Control Bar. verify that the value is set to 15.Los Angeles. select Winter Solstice. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. and click OK. Los Angeles. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. To maintain the proportions of the frame. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 3 For Sun Position.

■ For Dimensions. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise.Los Angeles. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. Click OK. TIFF. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select PNG. or GIF. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 8 Click Save. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. click the Desktop icon. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. such as JPEG. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. enter 450 in the first field (width).rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. In this example. depending on the Frame Range. BMP. click Save. as shown: 9 On the File menu. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. under 3D Views. For Files of Type. For File name. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . or any single-frame format.

as shown. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .2 Select the section box in the drawing area. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . For Time Interval. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . For Time. 12 In the Name dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.Los Angeles . click OK. for File name enter 2pm . and click OK. and click OK. for Sun Position. MA.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. clear Section Boxes. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and click OK. and on the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. 8 On the View Control Bar. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.Week Interval. 5 Select the roof. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the Multi-Day tab. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box.Boston. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select One week. specify 2:00 pm. USA. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . On the Annotation Categories tab.

enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. for File Name. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the Length/Format dialog. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click Save. When you mirror a project. Mirroring the Project In this exercise.West or North . 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. click OK. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View Control Bar. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. and annotations in non-drafting views. such as East . Click the Desktop icon. double-click 01 Entry. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). under Floor Plans.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. model views.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Re-orienting the Project | 447 .South. for Compressor. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. you mirror all model elements. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. and click OK. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.

NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. In this exercise. 6 On the Standard toolbar. Then. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser.West. click OK. right-click. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. select the roof. The project is mirrored along the East . under 3D Views. and click OK.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For additional information. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 5 In the warning dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 2 In the drawing area. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .West axis. select East .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.

Orienting to True North | 449 . change the time back to 12:00 PM. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 5 For Sun Position.3 On the View Control Bar. 11 For Sun Position. and click OK. click . you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click the Still tab. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. 8 For Sun Position. on the Still tab. select Summer Solstice. For example. 12 Under Date and Time. click . so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. and select Winter Solstice. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 10 Under Date and Time. specify 11:00 AM for time. and click OK. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click Apply.

Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. right click 01 Entry. 15 For Sun Position. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). click OK. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. click the Still tab. When a project is started.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 19 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. and select Winter Solstice. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. select True North. This process establishes the view setting to True North. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. click OK. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Orientation. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry. the view settings must be set for True North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 14 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North.

click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.■ To establish the True North direction. The floor plan rotates in the view. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. Orienting to True North | 451 . as shown. click toward the top of the screen.

28 In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. select Project North. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 25 In the Project Browser. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for Orientation. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click the Still tab. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. and click OK. right-click. and click Apply.23 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. select Summer Solstice. 32 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. right-click 01 Entry. 33 For Sun Position. select True North Orientation. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Rename View dialog. enter True North Orientation. and click OK. under 3D Views. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. and click Properties. and click OK. right-click 01 Entry. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. click . for Orientation. right-click.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. In the Length/Format dialog. click the Desktop icon. verify that AVI Files is selected. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. for Compressor. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Dimensions. Click OK. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click Summer Solstice. and click OK. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Click Save. Los Angeles. For File Name. under Format. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 600 in the first field. click the Single-Day tab. For Files of Type. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. click OK. Orienting to True North | 453 .

select Winter Solstice. for Scheme. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. 2 In the Project Browser. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. Since a rendered image is temporary. Under Lighting. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. In the Name dialog. for Date and Time. 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and 2:00 PM. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Interior: Sun only. click Render. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. under Settings.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. and click OK. under 3D Views. under Quality. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. select 12/22. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. capturing it. select Medium. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and exporting it as a JPEG image. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. and click OK. select Edit/New. and click Duplicate. for Setting. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Sun. 3 On the View Control Bar. (Show Rendering Dialog). ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. In this exercise. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. Rendered views do not have this limitation. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering.

enter living area_winter solstice. and click Save. click Save to Project. For Files of type. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. click Export. verify that JPEG Files is selected. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . 7 In the Save To Project dialog. click Desktop. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser.6 In the Rendering dialog.

456 .

Other tools in the software. or the client. type. Co-house.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Using the pre-built building model. In this series of exercises. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. and details. advanced model graphics. however. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Whether the audience is the general contractor. a consultant. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. linework. In this tutorial. 457 . you explore the stylistic approach. They include rendering. length. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. For the realistic approach. elevations. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. sections. When organizing presentation graphics. and section boxes. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. an outside reviewer. you can choose between realism and stylistics.

To fit the floor plan into the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a copy of the plan. you create a presentation floor plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson.

enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . Cnst.rvt. exit the menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and click Rename. click Training Files. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Cnst. right-click 2nd Flr. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise.

rvt. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. and Up Arrow. UP Text. This turns off the visibility of all tags. click the Annotation Categories tab. this represents the view getting smaller. No annotations display in the view. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. and clear DOWN Text. 11 In the Save As directory. dimensions. and other annotations in this view. expand the Stairs category. Down Arrow. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 7 Under Visibility. 12 Proceed with the next exercise.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Save. elevations. sections. navigate to the folder of your choice. 8 Click OK. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.

and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. select Cast Shadows. click . At that place. for Date and Time. specify 35. If you select a different city. NOTE For this step. Cnst. 7 For Place. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. ■ For Contrast. MA. 12 Click OK. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. modify. and click OK. 9 For City. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify 10/27. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. For Sun Position. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. however. the darker the shadows.rvt. you can create. 1:00 PM. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 3 On the View Control Bar. select By Date. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . click OK. Within a project. select Sun and Shadow Settings. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 2 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. The higher the number. click . ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click (Shadows Off). select Boston. double-click it in the Project Browser. 6 Under Settings. click the Place tab. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you can select any city. and select 1st Flr. on the Still tab. Time and Place. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.

click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. for Sun Position. . you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. under Settings. click (Shadows On). 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. and click OK. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. clear Ground Plane at Level.

6 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. click Sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . and click View. and notice the view title. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. right-click the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. click Modify. The viewport displays at the cursor. and click OK.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Arch Portrait. TIP If the View tab is not available. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

under Graphics. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Show Title. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 12 In the Name dialog. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. enter Presentation. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. select No. click . The viewport no longer displays a view title. For this analytique.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish this. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. and click Activate View. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Filled Region. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. select Invisible lines. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Chain. fill properties. click Edit/New. and the boundary of the region.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. click Region Properties. click . you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 20 On the Options Bar. If necessary. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. When you finish drawing the chain. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 22 On the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 17 In the Type Selector. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. click . create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant.

24 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Graphics. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Finish Sketch. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 25 In the Name dialog. under Name. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. scroll down. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. enter Solid Black. under Identity Data. click OK. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click . and click Deactivate View. click Duplicate. and click View Properties. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. select Solid fill. enter Presentation. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click OK. for Fill Pattern. for Sheet Name.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . right-click South. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.

TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 18 For Time. exit the menu. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click in the drawing area. select Cast Shadows. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click (Shadows Off). click in the Walls row. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click OK. 14 For Sun Position. 12 Under Shadow. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 On the View Control Bar. 9 Click OK. select By Date. Time and Place. specify 35. under Pattern Overrides. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. under Visibility. right-click Copy of South. click Duplicate. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. under Elevations. on the Model Categories tab. click OK. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. click . and click OK. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. specify 2:30 PM. enter Presentation South Elevation. under Visibility.2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and clear Elevation Swing. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. By changing the angle of the sun. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Settings. scroll up. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . expand the Doors category. clear Visible. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Override. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. 13 For Contrast. 16 In the Name dialog.

click Add View. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . and click Add View to Sheet. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Presentation. 3 In the Views dialog. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).

5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation.The viewport displays a view title. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The view title no longer displays.

you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471.

for Scale. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Cnst. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Section. 4 Add the section shown below. select 1: 100. double-click 1st Flr. under Floor Plans. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 3 On the Options Bar. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.

for Scale. this view needs to be rotated 180°. To accomplish this. as shown. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. select 1 : 100. expand Sections (Callout 1). Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . and double-click Section 2. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. 7 On the Options Bar. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view.Section 2 is added to the building model. To fit correctly in the analytique.

16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 15 Under Visibility. 17 Under Visibility. under Pattern Overrides. and click Rename. and click OK. expand the Doors category. right-click Callout of Section 2. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). click the Model Categories tab. and clear Elevation Swing. click Override.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click in the Walls row. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. and click OK. clear Visible. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 11 In the Rename View dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. enter Presentation Section 2. double-click Presentation Section 2. scroll up.

■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Hide Crop Region). Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. click The crop regions no longer display. 20 Click OK. 22 On the View Control Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 24 Proceed with the next exercise. When you select the crop region. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.

rvt. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 6 In the Name dialog. Click Apply. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Contrast. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Duplicate. double-click Presentation Section 2. In addition. in the Project Browser. and click OK. ■ For Sun Position. specify the following: Under Shadow. select Cast Shadows. The shadows do not offer much contrast. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. In the steps that follow. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify 35. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. 2 On the View Control Bar. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. under Sections (Callout 1). 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click .

Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Click OK. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Silhouette Edges. NOTE The line style. and click Advanced Model Graphics. was added to this training file for training purposes. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. For Altitude. select Silhouette Edges. specify 70°. for Silhouette style. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Shadows On). click OK. Select Relative to View. select Directly. specify 135°. For Azimuth. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles.

4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click A105 .Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click to place the selected view. under Sheets (all). 3 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Add View. select Section: Presentation Section 2. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

you click to specify the start radius. double-click Section 2. The section needs to be rotated 180°. click Modify. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . and press Enter. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. Using a clock as a reference. click (Rotate). move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. The view title no longer displays. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. select Viewport : Presentation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 6 On the Design Bar. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point.5 In the Type Selector. To rotate an object. under Sections (Callout 1). enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. In the steps that follow. 9 On the Edit toolbar.

12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 . 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.Presentation. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. under Sheets (all).The callout rotates 180°.

Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. 15 On the Design Bar. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. After applying the view template to a new section view. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.

double-click Presentation Section 2. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click OK.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Presentation Section 1. 4 In the View Templates dialog. right-click Section 1. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 3 In the New View Template dialog. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Type 1). Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique.rvt. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). enter Presentation. right-click Copy of Section 1. you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1).

under Names. annotations. select Viewport : Presentation. 15 Right-click the viewport. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and elevation swings no longer display. The furniture. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. double-click A105 .Presentation. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. lighting fixtures. select 90° Counterclockwise. and click Activate View.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . and click Deactivate View. for Rotation on Sheet. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 18 Right-click the viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. under Graphics. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. select Presentation. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Add View. under Sheets (all).

In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. such as a tracery window or a column capital.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. as shown.rvt. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). 4 In the Project Browser. After you add the callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. select the callout. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Callout. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Section 1.

under Extents. 8 Right-click. double-click Presentation Callout. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. enter Presentation Callout. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 7 Select the crop region. under Sections (Callout 1). as shown. clear Crop Region Visible. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Annotation Crop. and click OK.5 In the Rename View dialog. and click View Properties. and click OK.

double-click A105 . Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . Click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Add View. and click Activate View. under Sheets (all). click Modify.Presentation. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. For Scale Value 1. 14 In the Type Selector. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. select Viewport : Presentation. 12 In the Views dialog. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Section: Presentation Callout. and click Add View to Sheet. specify 22. select Custom.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.

NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. and click Deactivate View. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. and move it to the position shown below. click Filled Region. 23 On the Design Bar. When finished. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. activate the viewport. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. and make adjustments as necessary. under Sections (Callout 1). click Region Properties. In the steps that follow. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Presentation Callout. click Edit/New.

and click OK 3 times.25 In the Type Properties dialog. on the Design Bar. double-click A105 . sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. and click Activate View. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Fill Pattern. 28 In the Project Browser.Presentation. click Finish Sketch. click . click Filled Region. select Solid fill. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. When you are finished. under Sheets (all). The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once.

32 On the Design Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. 33 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 34 Select the crop region. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . click (Show Crop Region). The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.31 On the Options Bar.

38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. and click Deactivate View. click (Hide Crop Region).35 On the View Control Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows.

and apply shadows to the views. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. and click 1 : 200. click the Scale control. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. under 3D Views. click (Shadows Off). 3 On the View Control Bar. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. and click Advanced Model Graphics.rvt. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 On the View Control Bar. double-click Isometric. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways.

under 3D Views. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. A section box displays around the building model. Select Relative to View. For Altitude. right-click Isometric. and click Rename. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK. in the list. 8 In the Name dialog. Click OK. For Azimuth. and click OK. double-click Isometric 2. Cnst. select Directly. enter Isometric 1. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . For Contrast. specify 45°. enter Isometric 2.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Extents. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Select Ground Plane at Level. specify 135°. specify 35. Select 1st Flr. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Duplicate. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. select Cast Shadows. click . under 3D Views. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Silhouette Edges. select Section Box. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Rename. under 3D Views. for Silhouette style. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 12 In the Rename View dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. and click OK. For Sun Position. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser.

as shown. Grips display on each face of the section box. When you are finished. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .19 Select the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. TIP Notice the rotation symbol.

Presentation. make a copy of the view. you can adjust the plane location. the stairs and railings may display. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the section box. 31 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 21 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. double-click Isometric 2. clear Section Boxes. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Next.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. double-click Isometric 3. When you are finished. The section box no longer displays. If desired. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify on the Design Bar. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . 25 To hide the section box. 23 In the Rename View dialog. 29 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Viewport : Presentation. and click Rename. and click OK. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). 22 In the Project Browser. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. and click OK. double-click A105 . enter Isometric 3. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

32 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. The filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views.

37 In the Element Properties dialog. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. select Transparent. 36 On the Design Bar. 40 Click OK twice. 35 Select the poche filled region. click Lines. This will make it easier to draw lines. 39 For Background.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 42 Using the drawing tools. The image below shows the redrawn lines. click Region Properties. select Concrete. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . and click Activate View. click Edit. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. for Fill Patterns. 41 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.

click Region Properties. and click Deactivate View. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. click Edit/New. for Fill Pattern. select Solid fill. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 46 Click OK twice. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .43 On the Design Bar. 47 On the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Cnst. you create the final view for the analytique.rvt. double-click 1st Flr. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add it to the presentation sheet. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. a cutaway perspective view. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . under Floor Plans. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. then you specify the eye direction and range. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. The view opens immediately. click Camera.

and click OK. and click OK. specify the following: Under Shadow. for Name. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off).4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. select Cast Shadows. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. For Contrast. For Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. for Silhouette style. click . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 35.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. and click OK. 12 Select the section box. A section box now cuts through the building model. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. select Section Box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . Grips display on each plane of the section box.

and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. click Size. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. clear Section Boxes.14 Select the crop region. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Presentation. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 17 Under Model Crop Size. under 3D Views. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you must specify the actual size of the image. 18 On the View Control Bar. for Width. 15 On the Options Bar. select Viewport : Presentation. select Scale (locked proportions). 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. double-click A105 . On the Annotation Categories tab. click (Hide Crop Region). under Sheets (all). 19 To hide the section box. enter 165 mm. under Change. In the Type Selector. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

select the same font as the title.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click OK. select Text : Title. click Text. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. specify a text size of 6 mm. specify a text size of 40 mm. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Edit/New. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . and click OK. click Duplicate. 3 On the Options Bar. under Text. double-click it in the Project Browser. 6 In the Name dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . 10 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Description. select a font. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Text. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown.Presentation sheet is not the active view. click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Title. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . click Duplicate.rvt. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 23 Proceed with the next exercise.

click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. select Text : Description. 16 In the Type Selector.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

curtain walls. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. and roofs. In this tutorial. that compose the building. Once the model has been imported. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. 507 . you can easily add detail with Revit components. such as walls. you create a small building from the front mass form. After you import the SketchUp model.

TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. Click the Sketchup file. click OK. and not in the library.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . For Import units. 9 In the informational dialog. under Template file. and click Save. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. For Colors. 10 In the Name dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. 6 In the Save As dialog. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. Double-click the Common folder. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. for File name. visible elements. click Training Files. select Auto-Detect. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select SketchUp Files. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. right-click in the Design Bar. select Preserve. select All. enter SketchUp Model. enter Import SketchUp. buildings. you create a Revit Architecture project. For Layers.rte. For Files of type.skp. 2 In the New Project dialog. click the Massing tab. click Browse. or select from a list. click Create Mass.

curtain walls. 14 On the View toolbar.Center. Level 1 is the only choice. In a new project. select Level 1. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. such as walls. For Place at level.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. click . click the Close button. select Manual . NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. 16 On the Design Bar. Click Open. and roofs. depending on the complexity of the project. click Finish Mass. 17 In the warning dialog. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . ■ ■ For Positioning.

select the face so that it highlights in red. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. 3 In the Type Selector. that compose the building. After you create the building from the mass faces. and on the View Control Bar. click Roof by Face. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. verify Level 2 is selected. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. and roofs. for Level. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project.18 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. such as walls. verify Basic Roof: Generic . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.400mm displays. curtain walls. 4 On the Options Bar. and when the cursor displays a plus sign.

on the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. on the View toolbar. A roof is created from the mass face. click to display masses. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. click Create Roof. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. 6 On the Options Bar. To see the new roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . click Create Roof. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. 9 On the Options Bar. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.) to turn off mass visibility in the view.

■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 12 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. 14 On the Options Bar. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. click Roof by Face.

19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. verify Basic Wall: Generic . 16 On the View toolbar. click Wall by Face.200mm displays. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 .15 On the Design Bar. click roofs that you created. select Core Face: Exterior. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 22 In the Type Selector. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. for Loc Line.

24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 28 In the Type Selector. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click to view only the walls and roofs. 25 On the View toolbar. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click Curtain System by Face. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar.

click Create System. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 .30 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. 32 On the View toolbar. 31 Using the same technique. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

and on the Options Bar. click Wall by Face.35 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. click Curtain System. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 38 Select the mass face shown below. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face. select the other wall. and select it. click Create System. and on the Options Bar. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall.

45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. Below the right corner of the view. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. specify a point to place the camera. click Camera. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . double-click Level 1. and select the mass face shown below.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. 42 On the View toolbar.

roofs.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. click your building in the view. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. as shown. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . The perspective view created by the camera displays. 48 On the View toolbar. to view only the walls. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. specify a point for the camera target. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. Click the frame to display its grips.

and select the left curtain system in the view.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. select Center. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. 50 On the Options Bar. Under Grid 1 Pattern. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . for Justification. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click . 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Under Grid 2 Pattern. for Justification. select Center. Click OK. click Modify.

double-click {3D}.54 Select each roof to display its grips. click Door. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View 1. 56 In the Project Browser. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 59 On the View toolbar. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 55 Right-click. and move the roof edges as shown below. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 63 In the Type Selector. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. and click Cancel to end the command.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. click Training Files. Like walls. grid lines. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. and mullions. and you can change these elements individually. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. or you can use a specific curtain system command. you create a curtain system using the wall command. you need to change the length of the wall. and they are not windows.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To switch panel types. to resize the system. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. Unlike windows. To change grids. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. This affects the entire curtain system. panel. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. 525 . you need to select a panel. Like windows. For example. you select the grid.rvt. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls.

4 In the Type Selector. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .1 In the Project Browser. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and double-click Ground Floor. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. click Wall.

and double-click Southeast Isometric.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Creating an Entrance | 527 .

12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. For Top Offset. and click (Properties). 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. top constraint. Click OK. using curtain grids. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. and room bounding. top and base attachments.11 Select the curtain system. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. enter 1200. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint.

and resize the crop boundary as shown. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 25 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 20 In the drawing area. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary.a. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click Elevation. right-click Elevation 1 . 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click OK.

33 On the Design Bar. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. and SEVENTH FLOOR.26 While pressing CTRL. THIRD FLOOR. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. FOURTH FLOOR. one larger than the other. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. FIFTH FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. while pressing CTRL. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. click Curtain Grid. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. Click to place another grid line. Click to create a vertical grid. SIXTH FLOOR. select SECOND FLOOR. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. and click OK. click Modify.

and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Creating an Entrance | 531 . and then select the segment above it. Instead of using the Door command. you add a doorway to the curtain system. click Add or Remove Segments. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor.Next. The two segments are removed. and on the Options Bar. The segment line style changes to dashed.

40 On the Options Bar. 42 Place dimensions as shown. select One Segment. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. click Curtain Grid. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .38 Using the same method. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. and lock them.

47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Creating an Entrance | 533 . Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. click in any white space to exit the editor.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 43 Delete the dimensions. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. Use the following image as a guide. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.

double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. double-click Entrance Elevation. These panels schedule as doors. on the new curtain system you added. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. click Modify.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. under Floor Plans. 56 In the Project Browser. not as curtain panels. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 52 On the Type Selector. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones.Next. 55 In the Project Browser. . This changes the graphics style of the Next. Now. They are part of the curtain panel category. under Elevations. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. click view. 54 On the Design Bar. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 57 On the View Control Bar. The panel changes to a double door. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. and click Wireframe. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. click Training Files.

65 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. The glazed panels display in blue. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click . The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 61 With the panel still selected. 63 Click OK twice. click System Panel : Solid.60 On the Type Selector. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. and the solid panels display in white. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels.

you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 2 On the Options Bar. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Save As. select Entire Grid Line.68 On the File menu. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Grid Line Segment. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. click Mullion.

10 Delete the mullions below them. so you remove them next. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. because their width reduces the size of the doors. select All Empty Segments. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. there are a few that you do not want. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.6 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. however. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. You are going to change some mullion joins. clickModify. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions.

click Modify. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 14 Click the top mullion control. double-click Southeast Isometric. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. Finally.Two mullion join controls display. 17 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 16 In the Project Browser. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 15 On the Design Bar. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you can also right-click.

Curved Curtain System | 539 . 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. (Arc passing through three points). 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Top Constraint. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 4 In the Type Selector. For Top Offset. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Wall. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 7 On the Options Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. you add a curtain system using the wall command. Click OK. Finally. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. enter 1200.

14 In the Project Browser. Next. double-click East. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. you place grids on the system. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. click Curtain Grid. eighths. under Elevations. Divide the halves into quarters. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. and then sixteenths.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc.

and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. click Modify. you change some panels in the system. select Basic Wall: Generic . Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Next. select the bottom layer of panels. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. 18 In the Type Selector. to filter out all 19 Save the file. 16 On the Design Bar.300mm.

for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. click Training Files. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. click Finish Sketch. 8 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. click . 6 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and on the Options Bar. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. . 9 Select the extrusion. and click OK.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft. select Glass. 5 On the Design Bar. and click . click Model Lines. clear Chain. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. under Elevations. for Depth. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. enter 100. double-click Exterior.

click Modify. under Floor Plans. and return to the project file.Pattern. and click Change Walls Orientation.Pattern. right-click. select Curtain Panel . click 25 On the View toolbar.rfa family. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.rfa. click (Default 3D View). 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 19 In the Project Browser.Pattern. 24 On the View toolbar. 23 Right-click. All fourth floor panels are selected. (SteeringWheels). 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.14 On the Design Bar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 21 In the Type Selector.

you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 29 In the Type Selector. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. All the panels change to the solid panel. under Floor Plans.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. All fifth floor panels are selected. 30 Save the file. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 27 In the Project Browser. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. right-click. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. select System Panel .Solid.

10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. and enter 50 mm for the radius. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. click Training Files. select Mullion. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar.rft. click Lines. under Elevations. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . click Mullion. 8 On the Design Bar. Click again to specify the ending point. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and click OK. Select Radius. For vertical mullions. double-click East. and select it. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. for Profile Usage. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. click ■ ■ For Sides. enter 8. .

31 Click . 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.detail. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. click Modify. and click OK. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Visibility. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. and click Visibility. 20 Select the detail component. click Detail Component. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 27 In the Project Browser. click Mullion. click (SteeringWheels).rfa. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. clear Fine. After the new profile is loaded. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Training Files. 12 Select the lines in the octagon.11 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 19 On the Design Bar. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. and return to the project file. clear Coarse and Medium. under 3D Views. double-click Southeast Isometric. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 28 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa family. it can be added as a mullion type. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view.rfa. and click OK.

for Profile. right-click. 37 Click OK twice. 43 Press DELETE. 33 Click Edit/New. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. under Floor Plans. select All Empty Segments. 41 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 44 Save the file. click Duplicate. so you remove the unwanted ones. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. and click OK. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 38 On the Options Bar. 36 Under Construction. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. You have placed more mullions than you want.32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Circular Mullion for Family. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 40 On the Design Bar. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder.

under Floor Plans. All the inside faces highlight. make custom curtain panels and mullions. and a ruled curtain system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. and you can click to select them all. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. click Pick Walls. TIP To chain select all the walls. select Defines slope. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. In this lesson. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. double-click TOP OF ROOF. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. a storefront system. 4 On the Design Bar.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and press TAB. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. double-click Southeast Isometric. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file. 10 In the Project Browser. click Finish Roof. select Entire Grid Line. Sloped Glazings | 549 . select System Family: Sloped Glazing.7 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. enter 600. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Mullion. click Roof Properties.

Storefront System In this exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. under Floor Plans. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. and enter 2400. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector. select Unconnected for Height. 1 In the Project Browser. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall.

The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. click Edit/New. 12 Select the storefront wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. double-click Southeast Isometric. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. enter 10200 mm. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. Storefront System | 551 . and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. 9 On the Design Bar. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. 8 Click the temporary dimension. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. even if the wall height changes. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. under 3D Views. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 10 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. which is specified in the type. For this wall. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. click Modify. and click . To see how the grid layout is defined. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. This specifies an exact length for the wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout.

click Mullion. or end. you find Number. and Offset. center. double-click Southeast Isometric. Angle. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 19 Select a curtain grid. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. see the Revit Architecture help. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 16 Click OK. By setting the Angle value. under 3D Views.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 18 On the Options Bar. Justification. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. 20 Save the file. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. select All Empty Segments. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. enter 15. In this exercise. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle.

6 Click the highlighted line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines.3 On the View Control Bar. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and highlight the model line. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.

A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar.8 Select the highlighted line. A panel between the 2 lines is created. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. click Modify. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click . you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. Next. 11 Click OK. click Curtain Grid. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 10 Select the panel.

Curtain System by Lines | 555 . and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. quarters. embed a curtain system inside another wall. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. and then eighths. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. select System Panel : Solid. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 18 Save the file. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. quarters. and define a ruled curtain system. Finally. right-click. and then eighths. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system.

556 .

click Training Files. shed.Roofs 15 In this lesson. In this exercise. In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. mansard. and open Metric\m_Roofs. and low sloped roofs. and soffits to the roofs that you create. gutters. you learn how to add fascia. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 557 . In this lesson. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. gable.rvt. You do not need to create the work plane. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In addition. you learn to create several different types of roofs. including hip. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage.

Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and so on). click the blue square on the witness line. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and double-click Level 1. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. expand Views (all). 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs .1 In the Project Browser. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. expand Floor Plans. select Name. 5 In the Go To View dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. centerline. and click OK. click Ref Plane. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 4 Click OK.

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

13 On the Options Bar. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Lines. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. sketch the roof profile. 16 On the View toolbar. select Chain.Next. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane.

press CTRL. 19 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior face of the wall. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 21 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the edge of the roof. press TAB. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). click Modify.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Next. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). expand Sections (Type 1). and double-click Section 1. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. and select the second wall. 17 On the Tools toolbar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The roof should resemble the following illustration. expand Views (all). and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall.

click model. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. 26 On the View toolbar. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.24 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.

2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. and click Yes. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Garage Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 .You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Floor Plans. m_Roofs. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and enter 600 for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 5 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. click Pick Walls. sketch the roof footprint. 3 In the Project Browser. verify that Defines slope is selected. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.

edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click the model. 8 On the Options Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. 11 Press CTRL. click (Properties). the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. clear Defines slope. and click OK. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. click Finish Roof. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. By default. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View toolbar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . under Dimensions. 14 When you see the informational dialog. select both slope definition lines.

When you complete the roof. and double-click Level 3. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. clear Defines slope. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . expand Views (all). You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. press TAB. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. and enter 600 for Overhang.

click Modify. click Finish Roof. 8 On the Options Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Rectangle). click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 17 When you see the informational dialog. Next. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu. 15 On the Options bar. select Defines Slope. sketch the chimney opening. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 9 Using automatic snaps. Next. select Defines Slope. add new slope lines to the roof. click Lines.6 Click to select all the walls.

m_Roofs. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2.rvt.18 On the View toolbar. 3 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. click Pick Walls. select Defines slope. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 19 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. select the left vertical slope definition line. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Next. click (Trim/Extend). Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. clear Defines Slope. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. click Lines. close the roof sketch. using the following illustration for guidance. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 11 To trim the first line segment. and click (Pick Lines).

18 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click (SteeringWheels). 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click Finish Roof. click Roof Properties. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 14 Under Constraints. click Modify. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 17 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. Next. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 .

21 Click (SteeringWheels). 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 23 On the Tools toolbar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Next. join the two remaining walls to the roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.

press TAB. click Pick Walls. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. select the left vertical roof line. 10 To trim the first line segment. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls.rvt. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. enter 0 for Overhang. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). expand Views (all). m_Roofs. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. clear Defines Slope. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and enter 300 for Overhang. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch.

and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 16 Under Constraints. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. m_Roofs. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. expand 3D Views. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Roof Properties. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. click 20 On the View toolbar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). expand Views (all).11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 19 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. click Modify. and press ENTER. and double-click 3D. you add a slope-defining line. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.

click (Pick Lines). 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. click Ref Plane. 9 On the Tools menu. 7 On the Options Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. you need to add two reference planes. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. add two new slope arrows. Next. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. click Slope Arrow. clear Defines Slope. and double-click Level 2.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 12 On the Options Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Before you can add slope arrows. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 3 On the Options Bar. To help locate the position of each split. 11 On the Design Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Modify. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and enter 600 for Offset.

select both slope arrows. expand Views (all). select Slope for Specify. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise.15 to add the second slope arrow. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 18 Press CTRL. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 16 Repeat steps 13 . 20 Under Dimensions. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. When eave heights differ. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. m_Roofs. and double-click Garage Roof. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. click Modify.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. the adjacent eave heights must align. (Properties). click Edit. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. and then click OK. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. When you sketch a hip roof. expand Floor Plans. and click 19 Under Constraints. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 3 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and move the cursor to place the arrow. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights.

5 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. under Dimensions. on the File menu. 12 On the Design Bar. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Next. select a method to align the eaves. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 13 On the View toolbar. 14 If you want to save your changes. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click Align Eaves. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. on the Options Bar. (Properties).4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). and click OK. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. When aligning eaves. The eave lines display with a dimension. 10 On the Options Bar. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 3 Select the roof and. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Views (all). click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. on the Options Bar. (Properties). under Constraints. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. and double-click North. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. click Modify. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. expand Elevations. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

under Dimensions. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.6 On the View toolbar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. press TAB. and double-click Level 3. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. click Finish Roof. 14 On the Options Bar. Next. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. click (Pick Lines). and select the remaining three lines. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. expand Views (all). click Modify. click . expand Floor Plans. and then select Defines slope. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

After you add the roof. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. click Save As. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . on the File menu. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.17 On the View toolbar. click mansard roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add a roof to a building shell. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. under Floor Plans. verify that Defines slope is not selected. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. double-click Roof. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. click Pick Walls. 5 In the drawing area. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.Insulation on Metal Deck . for Type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 11 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties.Because the walls are not continuous. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Finish Roof.EPDM. click (Trim/Extend). Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. select Steel Truss . 7 On the Tools toolbar. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar.

but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. double-click the section head to open the section view.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. and click to select it. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. The roof has been created. double-click Roof. under Floor Plans. click (Draw Split Lines). 16 On the Options Bar. In the next steps. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently.

19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 20 Using the same method. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. and select a point on the opposite roof line.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 18 Move the cursor down.

click (Modify Sub-Elements). Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. on the Options Bar. Next. 23 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. You modify the points individually. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. (Add points).

584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Modify Sub-Elements). specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. 25 Using the same method. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. for the dimension. and press ENTER. enter -2''.

and on the Options Bar. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. for Elevation. click (Properties). Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 .27 Press and hold CTRL. 29 On the Design Bar. and select all of the roof edges. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. click Modify. 31 Select the roof slab. including the interior edges of the roof regions. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. enter 4''. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab.

The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. gutters. 37 If you want to save your changes. and soffits. gutters. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. for Structure. 36 View the results in the section view. and Soffits In this lesson. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. Creating Fascia. under Construction. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. After you create a roof. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 35 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. you learn how to create roof fascia. Gutters. Creating Fascia. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. The entire slab is sloped. and save the exercise file with a unique name.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. click Save As. By making the insulation layer variable. Gutters. select Variable. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and Soffits on page 586. you can easily create its fascia. for the Thermal/Air Layer. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. click Edit. 39 Proceed to the next lesson.

click Duplicate.rfa.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. enter Built-up Fascia. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click Open.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 8 In the Name dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 3 Press CTRL. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Properties). and click OK. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and click OK twice. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click Training Files. under Construction. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile.rvt. click Training Files.

14 Proceed to the next exercise.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 13 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). 2 On the Options Bar. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating Gutters In this exercise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. Creating Gutters on page 588. c_Condominium.

7 Under Materials and Finishes.3 In the Properties dialog. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. and click OK three times. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. Creating Gutters | 589 . click Duplicate. Creating Soffits on page 590. under Construction. 10 Click to place the gutter. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. . 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. and click OK. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. click Edit/New. click in the Value field for Material.

rvt. you learn how to place a roof soffit. click Pick Roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . c_Condominium.Creating Soffits In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.

4 Select the roof. 6 In the Project Browser. click Join Geometry. 8 Select the roof. 5 On the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. 7 On the Tools menu. and then select the soffit to join them. expand Views (all). Creating Soffits | 591 . Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Finish Sketch. expand 3D Views.

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Save As. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. select Millimeters. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Click OK. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. under Length. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. select Square meters.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Finally. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. select mm. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans.rvt. and open Common\c_Area. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. click Project Units. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. 3 Under Area. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. For Unit Suffix. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. If you are using metric units. 593 . click Training Files. your values will be different. In the final exercise.

You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. click Settings. These schemes define spatial relationships. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. the system-computed height defaults to the level. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. click the Area Schemes tab. click the Room Calculations tab. expand Floor Plans. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. Click OK. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. For Unit Suffix. select m2. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. or 0. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. 4 In the Project Units dialog. it is not necessary in this exercise. select 2 decimal places. right-click in the Design Bar. 9 Click Cancel. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. click OK. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. expand Views (all). 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click Room and Area. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog.

Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. To modify the area. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. forming a closed loop. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). When you select Yes in this dialog. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. under Views (all). 13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. If you select No. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. you must select one of the reference lines. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. click Area Plan. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. click Area. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. you must manually add these boundary lines. 12 When the informational dialog displays. rather than the area tag.

Click OK. and store area. you can either draw them or pick them. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). When you add area boundary lines. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. When you pick the walls. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 21 On the Options Bar. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Next. common areas. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. click Area Boundary. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. If you do not select this option. click Area Plan.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height.

click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 25 On the Design Bar. click Area. Select Office area for Area Type. click ■ ■ . 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 28 In the Element Properties dialog.23 On the Design Bar. click Modify. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 27 On the Options Bar. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. and click to select the area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 .

■ Click OK. click Area. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the area. 29 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. click ■ ■ ■ . 31 On the Design Bar. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 32 On the Options Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Click OK. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model.

■ Click OK. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Store Area for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 35 Add an area to the building model core. enter Core for Name.

the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click to place the legend. 37 On the File menu. In the next exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. click Save. name the project Area-in progress. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Color Scheme Legend. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. and click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory.Notice that within the two store areas. In this exercise.

select Area Type and click Add. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . click Schedule/Quantities.3 When the dialog displays. 7 Under Available fields. select Areas (Rentable). Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. click the Fields tab. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. and click OK. under Category. 5 In the New Schedule dialog.

9 Click OK. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.

At any time. and perimeter information. and roofs. building elements. you can specify the view to display massing elements. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. In this tutorial. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you then need to update the building face.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. curtain systems. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. volume. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. or both. floors. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. 603 . floor. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. After creating mass floors. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. After you make building elements. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. roofs. You assign the default wall. and floors. If you modify a massing face. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Views (all). TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. click Create Mass. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. and cutting geometry. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. sweeps. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . The Design Bar title changes to Mass. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 1. and click Massing. 5 On the Design Bar.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and click OK. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . for Name. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. (Line). 10 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Opaque). click (Default 3D View). 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. enter 1550 mm. 15 On the View Control Bar. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. for Offset. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click 18 On the Options Bar. and click . under Views (all). for Extrusion End. enter 25000. under Constraints. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. click Extrusion Properties. and click OK. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 8 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. (Pick Lines). and on the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. double-click Level 1. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor.

23 In the Materials dialog. 26 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. 30 In the drawing area. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. The second form is on top of the first form. click Finish Sketch. highlight the larger form. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. click the value for Material. select Mass (Transparent). under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. select Pick a plane. for Name. and click OK. enter 25000. 25 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. for Extrusion End. press TAB to highlight the entire face. enter 27500. for Extrusion Start. double-click {3D} to see the results. and click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. double-click West. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Extrusion Properties. TIP If necessary. 21 On the Design Bar. under Views (all).

click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. and clear Chain. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . click (Arc passing through three points).31 Click to select the face. click Lines. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). and on the Options Bar. Next. 34 On the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. and click to select the line start point. (Pick Lines).

double-click East. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 46 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Lines and. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Arc passing through three points from the menu.TIP If you do not see this option. under Views (all). and delete the vertical construction line. (Line). 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 39 On the Design Bar. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Modify. 41 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). 45 In the Project Browser. click Edit Top.

and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 50 On the Design Bar. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. (Arc passing through three points). In this exercise. for Material. In the next exercise. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Blend Properties. click 49 Create an arc as shown.48 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . click Finish Sketch. 53 On the View toolbar. 52 On the Design Bar.

6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click (Line). Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. select the mass. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Ref Plane. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 9 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 10 On the Options Bar. under Views (all).Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 2 In the drawing area. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. under Floor Plans. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. and select Chain. m_Massing_Start. as shown. 7 Using the same technique. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar.

on the View Control Bar. Using Swept Blends | 611 . 15 Click OK. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. click (Default 3D View). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. for Extrusion End. click Finish Sketch. When sketching each extrusion. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 0. 14 Under Constraints. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. In this exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. click Extrusion Properties.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 17 On the View toolbar. snap the corners to the intersections. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start.

and click Lines. select a point below the mass elements. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. m_Massing_Start. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. ■ For the radius.rvt. click Sketch 2D Path. double-click Level 1. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click Profile 1. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. click Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually. 8 On the Design Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. click (Rectangle). click (Default 3D View).Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. Using Swept Blends | 613 . verify that <By Sketch> is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Edit. click Finish Path. as shown. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass.

13 On the Tools toolbar. 15 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. 17 Using the same method. click Profile 2. and press ESC. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing .) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. click (Align). and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass.

click Finish Swept Blend. under Materials and Finishes. 23 On the Design Bar. click <By Category>. and click . click Swept Blend Properties. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Materials dialog.18 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent). Using Swept Blends | 615 . click Finish Profile. 22 Click OK twice.

You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you create new family types from a mass family file. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.24 On the Design Bar. Finally. click Finish Mass.rvt. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. In this exercise.

enter 6000 mm. enter 11000 mm. 6 For Width. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 46000mm. click Training Files. for Depth. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 9 Click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Apply. click New. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.rfa. and for Name. enter 18000 mm. click Family Types. enter 18000 mm. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 15000mm. 8 For Width. 5 Click New. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and click OK. and click Apply. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Height. 3 In the Name dialog. and click OK. for Height. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. for Width. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply.rfa. for Depth. 7 Click New. under Other. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. for Height. enter 9000 mm. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. In this exercise. for Depth. enter 68000 mm. and for Name. enter 12000 mm.

rfa. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 8 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.rfa. under Floor Plans. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. under Views (all).rfa. 6 Open the Box-Training. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. You also load other existing mass families and place them. Arc Dome. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 1 If not already selected. and Triangle. click Place Mass. 2 In the Project Browser. Semi Barrel Vault. double-click Site. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise.rfa family files. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 3 On the View Control Bar. on the View toolbar. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. as shown.

23 On the Options Bar. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . as shown. click Modify. select Rotate after placement. click Place Mass. click Modify.10 On the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the triangle. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 20 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. for the Material parameter. 24 On the Design Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. for the Material parameter. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Press CTRL. click Modify. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click Place Mass. click (Element Properties). 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 14 In the Type Selector. and click to place the mass. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 21 On the Options Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). and on the Options Bar. 25 In the drawing area. 16 On the Design Bar. select the 3 boxes. specify Mass (Transparent). 11 Select the box. enter 90 for Angle.

620 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK twice. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). 33 On the View toolbar. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. click Place Mass.26 Select the triangle. specify Mass (Transparent). specify Mass (Opaque). for the Material parameter. for the Material parameter. click (Default 3D View). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.

In the next exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. NOTE When you join geometry. click (Default 3D View). (Join Geometry). click 2 On the Tools toolbar. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. In this exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. you join these mass elements.rvt file. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.

Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 4 Select the triangle.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. click (Mirror). double-click Site. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. under Views (all). on the Edit toolbar. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans.

10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . for Axis. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.8 On the Options Bar. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click (Draw). 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. (Join Geometry). 17 Press ESC to see the result. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. as shown. click (Default 3D View). TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. and then select the triangle. enter SM. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click 14 On the Tools toolbar.

click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. and select the triangle mass element.In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. (If Design Options is already selected. you joined mass elements together. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. do not clear the check mark. 2 On the Window menu. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model.rvt. click (Add to Design Option Set). 1 On the Design Bar. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Modify. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise.

select Rotate after placement. under Views (all). double-click Site. click Modify. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. and click (Element Properties). Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 17 In the Type Selector. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 10 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. for the Material parameter. 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Type Selector. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Place Mass. and click OK. clear Curved. and click OK twice. for Angle. enter 90. specify Mass (Transparent). select Sloped (primary). 14 In the drawing area. 13 On the Design Bar.

24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. for the Material parameter. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. clear Sloped. and click OK twice. and click OK.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. under Views (all). While pressing CTRL. and watch the status bar. and click (Element Properties). click Modify. double-click North. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 28 In the Project Browser. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the three arc domes. TIP To find the correct shapes. 23 On the View Control Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. under Elevations. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. double-click {3D}. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. under 3D Views. click (Add to Design Option Set). 22 In the Project Browser. select Curved. under Views (all). 19 On the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. specify Mass (Transparent).

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. and click Close. click Make Primary. you placed mass elements into Design Options.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. 34 Close the warning that displays. 31 Click the value for Design Option. under Option. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. click the Design Options tab. select Curved from the Design Option menu. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. and click OK. select Curved and. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. click (Design Options). you can make it the primary option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 35 On the File menu. 33 In the Design Options dialog. In this exercise.

and for Loc Line. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Wall by Face. click (Pick Faces). click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 2 On the View toolbar. you pick massing faces to create walls. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rvt. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. select Wall Centerline.Brick on CMU. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click {3D}. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 5 In the Type Selector.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Basic Wall: Exterior .

The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 12 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. 8 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 3. click Wall by Face. 14 In the Project Browser. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . double-click Level 5. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown.

19 In the Project Browser.18 Select all the faces shown in red. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. under Views (all). 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Wall by Face. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 20 On the View Control Bar. If desired. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 21 On the Design Bar. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 9.

6 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. Curtain Systems. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. and Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. 8 On the Design Bar. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. and exterior surface area. select all levels. perimeter. click Modify. volume. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. double-click {3D}. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 4 Click OK. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. When you select levels. under Views (all).rvt. clear Curtain Panels. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . and click OK.In this exercise. click Mass Floors.

12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Levels 1-4. and click OK. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. click Mass Floors. 10 Press CTRL.

17 In the Mass Floors dialog. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Press CTRL. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. select Level 1. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 .14 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. and click OK. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step).

rvt. and click Add. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). select Mass Floor. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. press and hold SHIFT. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. 4 Using the same method.In this exercise. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. The Floor Area. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. Floor Volume. under Category. select Floor Area. and click OK. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. and select Level. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Floor Perimeter. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . schedules can be created using the mass floors. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.

according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. for Usage. enter Retail. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. for Sort by. select Mass: Family and Type. and click OK. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 .

You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Scheduled fields (in order). click Edit. for Fields. and click Remove. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. select Mass: Family and Type. 13 With Usage selected. under Other. and click Properties. 14 Select Level.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . After you assign usage. and click Move Up until Level is listed second.

select Floor Area. for Then by. 16 On the Formatting tab. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and click OK. for Sort by. and plan views. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. under Fields. for Filter by. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. 19 Click OK twice. 18 On the Filter tab. and click OK. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. 22 In the Project Browser. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . and select Grand totals. 24 In the Project Browser.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. elevation. under Other. and click Properties. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Level. click Edit. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and in the field below. for Filter. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. for Field formatting. click Edit. 27 Click OK twice. select Calculate totals. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. under Other. select Usage. in the field under Filter by. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). enter Hotel. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. 23 In the Rename View dialog. for Filter.

638 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. the floor area.In this exercise. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. click Roof by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. The mass floor schedules list. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. under Views (all). Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. double-click {3D}. you created mass floor schedules. you pick massing faces to create roofs. by level. floor perimeter.

and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements.4 In the Type Selector. Your model should now look as shown. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . 5 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof.400mm. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. select Basic Roof : Generic . 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

in the Type Selector. click Create Roof.8 Using the method you just learned. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 13 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 12 On the Options Bar. select Sloped Glazing. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and Walls. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. and click OK. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. Curtain Systems. In this exercise. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. select Curtain Panels.

double-click {3D}. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 3 In the Type Selector. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . click Curtain System by Face.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 Press CTRL. 6 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all).

7 Using the same method. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the blended form on the in-place mass.

11 Using the same method. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). Creating Curtain Systems | 643 .9 On the Options Bar. click Create System.

Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . you change the size of an existing mass family. In this exercise.rvt. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.12 Click Modify to exit the command. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.

4 Select the box mass family as shown. enter 30000. and Walls. Curtain Systems. for Width. 3 On the Model Categories tab.1 In the Project Browser. Floors. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. under Floor Plans. 7 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . click Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. and then click OK. 2 On the View menu. Next. under Views (all). clear Curtain Panels. clear Exclude Design Options. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Roofs. double-click Site. and click (Element Properties). you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.

10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 12 On the View Control Bar. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps.

15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 14 On the Options Bar. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click (Default 3D View). click Remake. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . 16 On the View toolbar. click OK.TIP To select the curtain wall. Also. you want to select the smaller one. 17 Select the roof as shown.

648 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.18 On the Options Bar. and click Remake.

20 In the Project Browser. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. 1 Open the 3D view. you changed the size of an existing mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements.

Massing only. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. click All to select all categories. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 Rename the view 3D . under 3D Views. 9 Select Mass. 3 In the Project Browser.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 8 Click None to clear the selection. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 On the Model Categories tab. right-click {3D}.

to the building shell. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 .In this exercise. If desired. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. This concludes the massing tutorial. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof. You might create the model shown.

652 .

In this exercise. you also simplify the modification process. and typical office layouts. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. For example. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. After you create a model group. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. The new group is considered nested within the host group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. In another exercise. In this tutorial. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. hotel rooms. all instances in the building model are updated. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. Modifying. and modify repetitive units. the host group is also updated automatically. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You mirror one instance of the group. Creating. place. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. 653 . you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. you add the new model group to a previously created group. You can also nest groups within other groups. you not only simplify their placement.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. By grouping objects. or with those working on a different project. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan.

enter ZR. expand Floor Plans. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. and double-click First Floor.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. expand Views (all). Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 Click in the drawing area. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group). The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. and click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. enter Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 .

and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify. select the center control for the group origin. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. click Modify. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. under Groups. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. right-click Typical Kitchen. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 .Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.14 On the Edit toolbar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. clear Copy. click (Mirror). NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

and on the Edit toolbar. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate). Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.

one mirrored. 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. as shown. and one rotated. click Modify. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

23 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modifying a Group In this exercise. When you finish editing. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. press TAB to highlight the wall. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt. click Save As. and click to select it. you make changes to an instance of a group. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group | 661 .

and click member to group instance. press TAB. press TAB.). 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. and click to select the door. 4 Move the cursor over the door. NOTE To display an excluded element.). and click to select the wall. click Modify. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.3 Click (Group Member. select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.). 8 On the Design Bar. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).

click Modify. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. Modifying a Group | 663 . select Basic Wall : Generic . 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 15 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. move the cursor to the left. click Wall.127mm. click Door. 13 On the Design Bar.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector.

21 On the Options Bar. In edit group mode. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 23 In the drawing area.17 On the Design Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. click Modify. move the cursor up.

30 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 29 On the group editor toolbar. under Constraints. 26 Select the opening. and click OK. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. created in an earlier lesson. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. which acts as the host. for Unconnected Height. click Finish. enter 2134. and the wall and folding doors for the closet.25 On the Design Bar. click 28 For Base Offset. Nesting Groups In this exercise. (Element Properties). enter 1000. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. Nesting Groups | 665 . all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.

under Floor Plans. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 5 In the drawing area. in the Project Browser. select the Typical Kitchen group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. double-click First Floor. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.rvt. click (Add to Group). 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Edit Group. 3 On the Options Bar. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary.

select the wall between the folding doors. and each of the bifold doors. click Finish. double-click Second Floor. Nesting Groups | 667 .6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. 7 On the group editor toolbar. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. such as text. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. you add door tags to a group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. and filled regions. In the next exercise. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. under Floor Plans. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. such as door and window tags. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. double-click First Floor.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.rvt. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects.

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Filled Region. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to draw a rectangular region.

15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 16 In the drawing area. click Text. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click (Group). and select the text note and the filled region.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Enter Tile. and on the Design Bar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. as shown. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click to add an arc leader. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.

expand Detail. double-click Second Floor. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. 20 In the Project Browser. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Because the detail group contains variables. 21 In the drawing area. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators.18 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. click Modify. under Groups. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group.

click Tag ➤ By Category. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. click Modify. clear Leader. 5 On the Design Bar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. double-click First Floor. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans.manner that a drawing component can be added. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.

and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. for Attached Detail Group Name. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags.7 On the Options Bar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. click Check None. under Floor Plans. double-click Second Floor. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. click (Filter Selection). 9 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. 8 In the Filter dialog. click (Group). Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Door Tags.

therefore. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. click Place Detail. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. click Modify.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. and click OK. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. When you load the group from the library into a new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.

accept the default template file. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. 12 On the Design Bar. In this case. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Desktop. click Modify. and expand Model. for Create new. and click OK. A warning dialog displays. 3 For File name.rvt. click OK. select 2 Bedroom Unit. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance.rvt. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Save Group. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. verify that Project is selected. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. verify that Same as group name is selected. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. browse to the Desktop. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. expand Groups. under Groups\Model. and click Save. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog.

When a group is converted to a link. and the link is removed. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and click OK.rvt file is added as a link to the project. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 17 On the Design Bar. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. and on the Options Bar. select the linked Revit model. click Remove Link. 20 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. click OK. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 In the message dialog. 23 In the confirmation dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Modify.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group.rvt. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Use Existing. click Bind. expand Revit Links. click Training Files. 18 In the Project Browser. click Link. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

Site 19 In this tutorial. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. In the final exercises. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. 677 . you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. Using Site Tools In this lesson. convert the data to a table. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. and walkways. you add a building pad to the site. You add property lines manually. and then modify the data. islands.

and open Metric\m_First_Project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Using the first method. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. and double-click Site. click Toposurface. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . click Point. expand Views (all). and click Site. 3 On the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. you create a toposurface using two different methods. click Training Files. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. In the second part of this exercise. This project file was created using the default metric template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar.

A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Creating a Toposurface | 679 .

and 18000mm absolute elevations. 15000mm. enter 1500mm. under Additional Contours. 12000mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm.8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . click Site Settings. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. under Increment. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. Use the following illustration as a reference. click Finish Surface. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. and click OK. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 12 On the Settings menu.

20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. and press ENTER. modify the level names and elevations. (SteeringWheels). 16 On the View toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. 15 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the View toolbar. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . click the elevation value. click (Default 3D View). enter 1000mm. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 18 In the Project Browser.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Before importing the contour data. under Views (all). 19 On the Design Bar. click to view it at various angles. and double-click South. click to delete it.

and press ENTER. under Views (all).21 Click the Level 2 text. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 23 Click the Level 1 text. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. For Colors. rename the level Basement. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. under Floor Plans. 30 On the Edit menu. select Preserve. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and press ENTER. double-click Site. 28 On the Design Bar. For Layers. click Pin Position. click Yes. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Until it is exploded. it is considered an import symbol. Click Open. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. select Specify. click Training Files. click Modify. 29 Select the imported topography.

36 On the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . when the edges highlight. click the Annotation Categories tab. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. and then click OK. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Toposurface. and click OK. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. clear C_INDX.31 On the Design Bar. When you select the import symbol. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. click Modify. 32 On the View menu. 34 Under Visibility. clear Elevations. select it.

Using the second method. 39 On the Design Bar. and click Save. 40 On the View toolbar. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . you add property lines using two methods. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 42 On the View toolbar. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Finish Surface.rvt. Adding Property Lines on page 684. Using the first method. name the project Site-in progress. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. this project file is required in its current state. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Default 3D View).

2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. On the Design Bar. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. do so before continuing. under Floor Plans. Adding Property Lines | 685 .This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. click Property Line. If you have not completed the previous exercise. and click OK. Click Modify. select Create property lines by sketching. click Lines. click Lines. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Site-in progress. Select and delete the right vertical line. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog.rvt.

10 In the Property Lines dialog. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. select Edit Table. to delete them. click OK. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. click Property Line. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click OK. when they highlight. select the lines. 6 On the Design Bar. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. click 12 On the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. A warning dialog is displayed.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. 9 In the warning dialog. add an arc line on the right.

click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data.14 In the Property Lines dialog. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 16 Click OK. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click to place the property lines. 15 Starting in Row #1. If the gap is not closed. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 19 In the Tags dialog. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Adding Property Lines | 687 .

click Training Files. click Visibility/Graphics. right-click in the Design Bar. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.rfa. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 25 Under Visibility. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 23 On the View menu. click the Imported Categories tab. click to place it. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. The tags display more prominently in this view. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. In the final step. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 30 On the View Control Bar. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. In the next exercise. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. you created two sets of property lines. and click Drafting. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. Before adding property line segment tags. and click OK. 22 In the Tags dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.dwg and click OK.20 Click Load. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. this project file is required in its current state. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 On the Options Bar. clear Leader.

6 In the Object Styles dialog. Under Line Pattern. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. for Subcategory. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. select a shade of Brown. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Under Line Color. select Topography. click Object Styles.0mm. enter 1000. select Single Value. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. enter the name Working Contour. click Site Settings. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. 7 Click OK. In the Object Styles dialog.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. and click OK. 2 On the Settings menu. Site-in progress. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. select Working Contour. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 .rvt. select Dash dot. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. under Contour Line Display. click New. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. 10 Under Additional Contours. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Under Range Type. Under Subcategory.

12 Click File menu ➤ Close. parking areas. In the next exercise. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. and islands. The object style subcategory. In this exercise. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.11 Click OK. you create topographic subregions to define roads. Working Contour. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. and islands. you create subregions in order to define roads. parking areas. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. such as material. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . The next exercise requires a new training file. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. you created a new object style subcategory for topography.

the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. and open Metric\m_Site. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . 2 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. try to replicate the location and proportion. click Subregion. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click the value for Material. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. When you finish the sketch in a later step.NOTE In the Metric training file. and click OK. and click OK. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and click to open the Materials dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. under Materials and Finishes. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Properties. enter Parking for Name. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Materials dialog. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Site .Tarmacadam for Name. under Identity Data.

9 On the View Control Bar. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser.Tarmacadam. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 12 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. and double-click Topography Schedule. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. they display within this schedule. As you create new subregions. click Edit Boundary. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . expand Schedules/Quantities. 14 On the Options Bar.

694 | Chapter 19 Site . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Notice that the project area has increased. under Schedules/Quantities. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Delete overlapping lines. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Design Bar. Within each subregion. 20 On the View Control Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. click Lines. In this training project. double-click Topography Schedule. double-click Site. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. click Subregion. 17 On the View Control Bar.

27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. under Materials and Finishes. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 26 In the Materials dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. enter Island . and click to open the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.23 In the upper-right parking area. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 29 On the View Control Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. and click OK.Grass for Name. 24 On the Design Bar. select Site .Grass for Name. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. and click OK. click Properties. click Finish Sketch. click the value for Material.

31 In the Project Browser. Name the subregion Walkway. double-click Topography Schedule. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. click Subregion. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. 35 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Design Bar. Name each region Island Grass. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site.walkway. Notice that the schedule has been updated. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. click Lines. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. and apply the material Site . 32 In the Project Browser. You must sketch each region separately.Grass. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.

there is still only one toposurface. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . double-click Topography Schedule. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. click Finish Sketch. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. under Schedules/Quantities.

this project file is required in its current state.rvt. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. When you use the grading tool. name the project Site tutorial-in progress.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. double-click Site. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. under Floor Plans. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . 2 Select the toposurface. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. and click Save. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise.

click Modify. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. Using Phasing on page 761. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. A warning dialog is displayed. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . 8 Select the topographic surface. select Existing for Phase Created. and click OK.3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). Notice that the toposurface displays differently. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. under Phasing. see the tutorial. select Copy Internal Points. click Graded Region. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. 6 On the Design Bar. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. and click Select and Edit.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . 10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. and new. Grading the Toposurface | 701 .Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. demolished. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

click Finish Surface. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 19 On the View Control Bar. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . 18 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). click Point. 15 On the Options Bar.13 Press DELETE. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.

it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. When you add a building pad. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. Only the graded topography displays. specify New Construction for Phase. and click OK. and delete it. 24 On the View menu. 23 Select the toposurface. (SteeringWheels). 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties. specify Existing for Phase. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Therefore. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. only the original toposurface displays. click View Properties. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . and click OK. under Phasing. you create a building pad. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display.20 On the View toolbar. click to view it at various angles. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. you can delete it. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu.

The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. click Pad. the Pick Walls command is active. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. double-click Site. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Site tutorial-in progress. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. If you have an existing building model. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE By default. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

this project file is required in its current state. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. 8 On the View toolbar. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. click (SteeringWheels). Notice the new building pad. Adding Site Components on page 706. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 On the View toolbar. 7 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click (Default 3D View). Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

under Floor Plans. click Parking Component. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 706 | Chapter 19 Site . and select the parking space. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. double-click Site. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. click Modify.Adding Site Components In this exercise. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.90 deg. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. click (Default 3D View). TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Adding Site Components | 707 . 8 On the View toolbar.

708 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 In the Type Selector.9 On the View toolbar. double-click Site. Notice the new parking spaces. under Floor Plans. choose any tree type. click (SteeringWheels). 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. click Site Component. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

Adding Site Components | 709 . NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. 14 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. click (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View).13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. In the following illustration. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. 15 On the View toolbar.

Site tutorial-in progress. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. click Hidden Line.rvt. 5 On the View menu. click Apply. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. under Floor Plans. and click Apply. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. this project file is required in its current state. double-click Site.

outside of the site. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. In the following exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. to position the shoulder of the leader. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. Click again to the left to position the leader. Click up and to the left. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. as shown: 10 Using the same method.

and select the 3 spot dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 14 On the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 .■ Clear Leader. you create a parking schedule. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. click Modify.

9 On the Window menu. select Mark. select Type. 6 Click the Formatting tab. If necessary. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Space. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. click Tile. 11 On the Window menu. under Views (all). click the Fields tab. under Floor Plans. number the first three spaces consecutively. and under Heading. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . select Parking for Category.rvt. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. and click OK. select Mark. enter Size. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and under Heading. The parking schedule is displayed. and click OK. 12 In the Site plan. 7 Under Fields. Site tutorial-in progress. 4 Under Available fields. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 5 Under Available fields. enter Space. 8 Under Fields. 10 In the Project Browser. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities. click Close Hidden Windows. and click Add. select Type. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . This allows you to know which space you are numbering.

716 .

Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. use Element Borrowing. select the desired workset. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. go to the Worksets dialog. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. When you are working on a shared project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. such as walls. Using Worksharing. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. and so on. such as annotations and dimensions. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. floors. doors. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. called Worksharing. A workset is a collection of building elements. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. and click Editable. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. you specify an active workset. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. To make a workset editable. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. Elements specific to a view. All other team members can view this workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. You can enable Worksharing for any project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you can select which worksets are open or closed. The first time you activate worksets within a project.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. they cannot make changes to it. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. After the project is shared. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. stairs. In this tutorial. however. you must first enable Worksharing.

Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs.dialog. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. In most projects. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Shared Levels and Grids. Experience has shown that. such as a tenant interior. for a typical project. not including the Project Standards. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Instead. After learning the fundamentals. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. When setting up Worksharing. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You should have at least one workset for each person. In the next exercise. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. and View worksets. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. In a multi-story structure. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project.

each team member has control over a portion of the design. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing.Team member roles Typically. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When you create a new workset. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. When creating the new worksets. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. if a workset named Interior was created. For example. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. with each assigned a specific functional task. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. As new members create worksets for their own use. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Regardless of the default setting. designers work in teams. On this tab.

This is called “Selective Open. you should then save to your local file. When you save locally (to your local file). you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. within the local file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you make that workset editable by you. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. After saving to the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. This makes them available to other team members. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Therefore. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. As you work. When finished or at regular intervals. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. your changes are saved. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. On the Options Bar. However. the file is saved as the central file. proceeds as usual. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. Generally. you can select which workset is active. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. When you save to the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. your changes propagate to the entire team. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. however. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. When you save to the central file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time.

■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. When working remotely. you should check out the Materials workset. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. using VPN. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. Alternatively. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. and make that workset editable. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. In the next exercise. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. if you know who checked out the required workset. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. In this situation. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. for instance. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. make any required worksets editable. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. In this instance. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . save to the central file. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you work no differently then you would in the office. reload the latest changes from the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. To do this. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. and then save the local file. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported.

you enable Worksharing within an existing project." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Worksets. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 3 In the Worksets dialog. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Your username displays as the present owner. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. under Show. When you enable worksharing. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. and open Common\c_Worksets. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. The Worksets dialog displays. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and notice all are editable by you. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.

clear Families. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". clear Visible by default in all views. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. under Identity Data. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. currently named Workset1. In this simple training project. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. In this case. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click OK. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. In this training file. expand Floor Plans. ■ 5 Under Show. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Therefore. you can rename the default workset. 9 Click New. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. another is assigned the interior layout. Because the interior walls appear in many views. click OK. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 11 In the Worksets dialog. expand Views (all). and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Only User-Created worksets should display. click New. type the name Exterior Shell. and double-click Level 1. and Views. For example. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. 13 In the Rename dialog. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 12 Click Rename. click . You do. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 .■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. For training purposes. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. 14 In the Worksets dialog. imagine four users including yourself. When you initially activate Worksharing. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. however. 17 On the Options Bar. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. it is better to make them visible by default. Project Standards. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. and click OK. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. select Workset1. 16 In the drawing area. select any of the exterior walls of the building model.

27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click . 23 Select all of the interior elements. click the Worksets tab. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. and walls. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click . under Identity Data. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. under Identity Data. select Interior Layout for Workset. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. stairs. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 20 Select one of the interior walls. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 29 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 24 On the Options Bar.19 Click OK. and click OK. including the interior doors. 26 On the View menu. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner.

The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 30 On the View menu. 44 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 32 Select Interior Layout. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Save As. click the Worksets tab. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. double-click Level 2. 39 Click Save. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click . but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 42 On the right side of the dialog. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 41 In the Worksets dialog. under Identity Data. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. If any interior elements remain. make sure you remember the location of this central file.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 35 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 43 Click OK. select all of the interior elements of the building model. click Close. and click OK. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 38 In the Save As dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . 33 In the Project Browser. click Non Editable. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. click Worksets. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 34 In the drawing area. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. select Interior Layout for Workset. Now that you have created the central file. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.

Next. 7 In the Save As dialog. check out worksets. If you have not yet completed the exercise. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. In this case. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. select Interior Layout for Name. and select Yes for Editable. select Interior Layout. 4 Click Open. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. and click Save. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. click Open. expand Views (all). This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. expand Floor Plans. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. In addition. please do so before continuing. click Save As. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 13 On the Window menu. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. 12 Click OK. click Options. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. Before working on the model. and click OK. 2 In the Open dialog. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. select all the User-Created worksets. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and select Specify. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. click Worksets. you create your local file. 15 In the Project Browser. make modifications to the building model. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 11 In the Worksets dialog. select the central file. 6 On the File menu.

23 On the File menu. click . 24 Click OK. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Verify that it is cleared. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. click . In the Worksets dialog. however. If it was owned by another user. 22 Click OK. 20 Under Constraints.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. notice the Editable Only option. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. On the Options Bar. click Modify. 21 On the Options Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. click Worksets. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . In this case. and click OK. Because this element is not owned by another user. you can still edit this wall. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. If this is selected. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes.

32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 26 Delete the door. 31 On the Design Bar.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner.126mm Partition (2-hr). select Basic Wall: Interior . 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 29 In the Type Selector. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Modify. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . The precise location is not important. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 34 In the Type Selector. click Wall.

leave this file open in its current state. checked out worksets. add two door openings into the rooms you created. In this particular case. and reload the latest changes. At the end of a work session. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. you created your local file. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. By default. save to central. Whenever you save. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. and save locally immediately afterward. make elements editable. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. two users access the central file through a network connection. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. a tooltip. displays the workset as well as the element type. which matches the information in the Status Bar. you should perform regular saves. For training purposes. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. Throughout the process. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. When working in your local file. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Borrowed Elements is selected. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. You modified the building model.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. In this exercise. each user must check out worksets. you should relinquish all worksets. please do so before continuing. click Save to Central. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. In addition. If you have not yet completed these exercises. it is recommended.

enter User 2. In the following section of this exercise. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.rvt. In addition. and select Specify. and click OK. instructions are staggered. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. and click Save. specifically sequenced. 12 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. click Save As. This is a system setting. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Options. 7 In the Open dialog. one user has already created a local file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 4 Click the General Tab and. consider that person to be User 1. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. skip the following section. This file is for your use only. and reset the Username to your computer login name.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and select Yes for Editable. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. return to the Settings dialog. 3 On the Settings menu. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. User 2: Create a local file. You now have a local copy of the project. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. click Options. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. select the central file. click Open. click Worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 11 On the File menu. under Username. select all the User-Created worksets. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and proceed to Creating a local copy. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. For training purposes. 15 On the File menu. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 9 Click Open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise.

20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. User 1: Check out worksets. expand Views (all). 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog.” 29 Click OK. and select Yes for Editable. expand Floor Plans. 23 Click OK. 27 On the File menu. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. modify the building model. click Save to Central. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. If you only have one workset checked out. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide.You are now the owner of that workset. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. click Worksets. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . and double-click Level 1. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. it becomes the active workset. 17 Click OK. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. expand Floor Plans. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and double-click Level 1. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. 19 On the File menu. open it now. select the lower exterior wall. expand Views (all). 24 In the Project Browser. If it is not open. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout.

under Floor Plans. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Save to Central. Click Yes. click Save to Central.” 35 Click OK. select Yes for Editable. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. under Floor Plans. 33 On the File menu. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 37 On the File menu. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 44 In the Project Browser. 46 In the Project Browser. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. click Worksets. under Views (all). enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. User 1: Reload latest worksets. you should create a furniture plan view. 45 In the Rename View dialog. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . However. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. click Reload Latest. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. Before adding any furniture. 43 In the Project Browser. 41 On the File menu. right-click Copy of Level 1. The changes User 2 made are apparent. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.” 39 Click OK. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 42 Select Furniture Layout. When you save to central. right-click Level 1. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. and click Rename. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide.

click Save to Central. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. 50 On the View menu. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. choose any desk. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset.” 55 Click OK. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Reload Latest. click Modify. click Rename. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click the Worksets tab. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 53 On the File menu. enter Exterior Wall .200mm. 61 Click OK 2 times. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 65 Click OK. 60 In the Rename dialog. 49 On the Design Bar. click Worksets. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 63 In the Worksets dialog. NOTE System families. such as Wall Types. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. and click OK.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . select Project Standards. click Save to Central. and click inside any room. 66 On the File menu. are placed under Project Standards. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. rather than Families. click Component. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. and click OK. Therefore. click Edit/New. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. under Show. the Visible by default option was not selected. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 62 On the File menu. 48 In the Type Selector. and click Element Properties. click Visibility/Graphics.

you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. In the final exercise of this tutorial. 3 In the Save As dialog. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. This exercise requires two users and. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. click Options. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and still have your local files open. select Save to Central. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 71 In the Save to Central dialog. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2).rvt. Each user checked out worksets. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. As each of you work. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. leave this file open in its current state. and these problems are rectified. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. finished the previous workset exercises. modified the building model. There are specific instructions for each user. and click OK. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. User 1: Reload latest. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Each user must have network access to the central file. you save the training file as a central file. you need to set up your central and local files. In subsequent steps. click Save As. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. throughout this training. and save 69 On the File menu. 70 On the File menu. Checking out worksets. select Reload Latest. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. select the following. and published their changes back to the central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. leave this file open in its current state. At the appropriate point in this exercise. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. click Training Files.

and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. You have created a local file which is for your use only. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. The central file should still be open. This is the local file for User 1. 8 In the Save As dialog. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Next. and click OK. This is a system setting. click Save As. 15 Click Open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Save As. return to the Settings dialog. and click Save. and click Save. and click OK. and select Specify. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. 12 On the File menu. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. click Options. On the Settings menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select the central file. 18 In the Save As dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 13 In the Open dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets.4 In the File Save Options dialog. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. Set the Username to User 2. select Make this a Central File after save. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click OK. click Open. 5 Click Save. In addition. click Options. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 6 On the File menu. click Options. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. 17 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model.

Afterwards. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 27 Under Active Workset.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. and click Editing Requests. and click Open. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. select Interior Layout. 24 Under Active Workset. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. click Worksets. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. click the File menu. double-click Level 1. select Exterior Shell. After you submit the request. under Floor Plans. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and then click OK. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. You are now the owner of that workset. and select Yes for Editable. select the Interior Layout workset. 26 In the Worksets dialog. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. 30 On the left exterior wall. if any User-Created worksets are not open. You are now the owner of that workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. select the second window from the top. and then click OK. select them. and select Yes for Editable. click Worksets. 22 In the Worksets dialog. 29 On the Options Bar. At this point.

and click OK. click Check Now. In this multi-user exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . 35 Click Grant. select Save to Central. to Local. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. and the other user granted it. select the request submitted by User 2. 38 Click OK. and notice the window is in the new location.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. 36 Click Close. A message informs you that your request has been granted. click Close. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. you requested permission to edit the element. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. select the following. and close 39 On the File menu. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. In this case.

738 .

In this particular case. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. In addition. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can have multiple sets of design options. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. In this tutorial. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. After you and the client agree on the final design. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). At any time in the design process. For example. 739 . Using design options. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. and each option set can have multiple schemes. The client has asked you to create various options.

The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. With the second option. therefore. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. 2 In the Design Options dialog. click Training Files. In the second exercise. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. make your final design decision. the only available command is to create a new option set. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you can edit it.In the first exercise in this lesson. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). and delete the unwanted options from the project. each with multiple design options. you design each of the structural options. the roof and structure systems must work together. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. TIP In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. each is constructed for interchangeability. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. and click Close. under Option Set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Edit Selected. click New. you set up multiple design option sets. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. After you create a design option. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the final exercise of this lesson.rvt. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary).

and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. click Column. In this case. TIP To center the middle column. select: ■ ■ ■ . You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. expand Floor Plans. In the following illustration. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all). 5 On the View menu. By selecting Multiple. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). click 12 On the Options Bar. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch.4 In the Project Browser. add three columns. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. and the third column centered between the two. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. or add a dimension string between the columns. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. click Modify. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 11 On the Edit toolbar. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments.

TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 17 Zoom out and. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . When you are finished. Because of the size of the columns. click . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 18 On the View toolbar. using the same technique. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. A copy of the three selected columns is added. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. they are difficult to see in this view.

under Floor Plans. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 23 On the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a guide. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Next. Adding a beam is a two-click process. double-click TOP OF CORE. you add the beams that span the columns. In it. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 19 In the Project Browser. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 21 In the Type Selector. select Round Bar : 50mm. Zoom in on the upper right column. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 .Notice the 12 columns that you added. and click at its center to set the beam start point. click Modify. click Beam. The first click specifies the beam start point.

This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. move down to the next set of columns. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . select: ■ ■ ■ . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click . 30 On the View toolbar. zoom into the left column. and click the center point. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy. click 26 On the Options Bar.25 On the Edit toolbar. 28 Zoom out.

38 In the Rename dialog. enter Brackets for New. click Rename. select Option 1 (primary). click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option Set. under Option. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 34 In the Design Options dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option. 37 Select Option 2 and. enter Roofing for New. and click OK. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. name the option Louvers. enter Structure for New. There should now be two roofing design options. 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. 43 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. click New. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. and click OK. 46 Under Option. enter Beam for New. 36 In the Rename dialog.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click New. not a new option set. 45 Under Roofing. 41 Under Option Set. click Rename. under Option Set. under Option. click Rename. 40 In the Rename dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. click New. under Option.

52 Click Close. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. click Rename. select Option 2. and click OK. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 51 Under Edit. under Floor Plans. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 48 Under Option. select Edit Selected. When finished. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Under Now Editing. 50 In the Design Options dialog. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. you create the second design option. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. it will resemble the following illustration.47 Under Roofing. name the option Sunscreen. select Beam. 53 In the Project Browser. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. under Structure. This allows you to more easily manage the project.

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. click Align. 58 On the Tools menu. select M_Roof Beam. Refer to the following illustration.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The second click represents the plane that is moved. click Component. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 56 In the Type Selector. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks.

The second click represents the move end point. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam.60 After aligning the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move. The first click sets the move start point. on the Edit toolbar. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 61 On the Design Bar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 62 Select the beam and. click Modify. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.

you need this file in its current state. name the file. m_Urban_House-in progress. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created.rvt.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. click Finish Editing. 66 On the View toolbar. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . 68 In the Design Options dialog. 67 On the Tools menu. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 70 On the File menu. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Save As. 69 Click Close. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. which is visible by default. and click Save.

Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. open it now. Sunscreen. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. The first option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. click Component. If you need to add dimensions. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. and double-click TOP OF CORE. In the next exercise. 2 On the Tools menu. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. With the second option. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. under Roofing. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. a Louver system. Under Now Editing. select Louvers (primary). 4 Under Edit. click Edit Selected. The second roofing system. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . do so now. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams.rvt. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. expand Views (all). click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 8 In the Type Selector. each with multiple design options to pick from. 5 Click Close. delete them after the rafter is in place. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. you design each of the roofing options. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options.In this exercise. 10 Referring to the following illustration. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. the other for beams. you set up multiple design option sets. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 3 In the Design Options dialog.

11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click Modify. Enter 5 for Number. click Array. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. under Other. 15 On the Edit menu. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. Select Constrain. Select 2nd for Move To. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. enter 11750 mm for Length. 16 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK.

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. and press ENTER. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . when the listening dimension displays. enter 990.

select Louver 50mm x 150mm. 26 On the Options Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 20 In the Type Selector. under Other. click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. and select the louver you just placed. 25 With the louver still selected. enter 5475 mm for Length. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. Enter 34 for Number. click the Edit menu. Select Constrain. 27 For the array starting point. Select 2nd for Move To. and click Array. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. click . The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system.

when the listening dimension displays. enter 300. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .28 Move the cursor vertically downward. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. 29 On the View toolbar. and press Enter. click . and.

click Edit Selected. expand Elevations. under Edit. click Finish Editing. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 34 In the Project Browser. Therefore. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Lines. select Sunscreen. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . Click OK. In this case. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. and click OK. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click .The louver roof system is complete. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. and double-click West. 33 Under Editing. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. under Roofing. 31 In the Design Options dialog. 30 On the Tools menu. 39 On the Design Bar. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and then click Close. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 40 On the Options Bar.

41 Select the top of the left column. then you can modify it through the dimension. The arcs should connect. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. click .This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. click Properties. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. Under Constraints. Select the right arc. then the center arc. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. Under Constraints. 49 On the View toolbar. the top of the next column on the right. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. You will fix this in a later step. The first two points define the ends of the line. 46 On the Tools menu. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. and the third point defines the arc. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 48 On the Design Bar. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. click Finish Sketch. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 43 On the Design Bar. 45 Click OK. click Trim/Extend. NOTE As you sketch the arcs.

and click Rename. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. do so now. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you need this file in its current state. under Views (all). under Edit. After exploring the combinations. you designed each of the roofing options. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. and delete the discarded design options. secondary. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. right-click {3D}. under Views (all). expand 3D Views. make it part of the building model. click Finish Editing.The louver roof system is complete. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. and last options. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Managing Design Options In this exercise. a Louver system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. you select a design. and click OK. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. Sunscreen. tertiary. 52 On the File menu. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. In this exercise. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. Managing Design Options | 757 . and click Duplicate. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. The first option. and then click Close. The second roofing system. under 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Primary Option. 4 In the Project Browser. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. 51 In the Design Options dialog. 50 On the Tools menu. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion.

click the Design Options tab. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Primary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). 9 Click OK. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click Rename. 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.5 Right-click each of the copies. 7 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. double-click Secondary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. and click OK. 11 On the View menu. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under 3D Views.

and click OK. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. At this point. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 15 On the View menu. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option.14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. Managing Design Options | 759 . In this case. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. In your design options. under Views (all). double-click Tertiary Option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 19 On the View menu. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.

30 Under Option Set. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. and deleted the discarded design options. After exploring the combinations.22 On the Tools menu. 27 In the alert dialog. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 25 Select Structure. The set is deleted. select Make Primary. click Save. the beam option becomes part of the model. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. An alert is displayed. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. This was the client choice for structural. In this exercise. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 35 On the File menu. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . made it part of the building model. click Accept Primary. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. double-click Primary Option. 24 Under Option. click Close. but should be accepted as part of the building model. you selected a design. under Structure. 26 Under Option Set. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 33 In the Design Options dialog. since you no longer need them. click Delete. select Beam. 31 In the alert dialog. 29 Select Roofing. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the current primaries are no longer options. click Yes. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Yes. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Because the client has selected the design option.

you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. and then add new building model elements. demolish existing construction. In the lesson and exercises that follow. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. In the second exercise. then add new walls and doors in a different location.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. 761 . You create new phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. For the client. In the second exercise. You create new phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. complete with schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. This changes room definition and total building model area. demolish existing walls and doors. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Project Units. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. 7 Click Cancel. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. 4 Click Cancel. you do not need to change the project units to metric. and open Common\c_Phasing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. under Phasing. under Phasing. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. define the units. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. As you add new elements to the building model. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. go to the Settings menu. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. When you create a new project. click Training Files. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. click (Element Properties). are visible in this view. regardless of phase.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. expand Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. In the Element Properties dialog. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. click Modify. This means that all building model elements. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. If you wish to do so. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. During the demolition and renovation process.

This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. and click OK. click . 20 In the Rename dialog. for Phase Created. and click Rename. and click OK.Demo. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. enter Level 1 . click Modify. right-click Copy of Level 1 . 11 In the Filter dialog. Because this is a phase-specific view. 16 In the Rename dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. TIP If this were a multi-story building. select Existing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. and click Rename. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 19 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 .Existing. Because this is a renovation project. under Floor Plans. After you release the mouse button.Existing. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. are highlighted in red.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. After you create the views. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. including the door tags. and click OK. right-click Level 1. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. all of the building model elements. 17 Click No. under Phasing. 14 On the Design Bar. Phasing Your Model | 763 . click (Filter Selection). Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. under Floor Plans. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. right-click Level 1 . You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. under Floor Plans. clear Door Tags. 12 On the Options Bar.Existing.

This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. select Existing. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. you modify these settings. Next.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. 21 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. You may need to zoom in to see this. There are five default phase filters. for Phase. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. double-click Level 1 . 29 For Composite Plan. 26 In the Phasing dialog. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Existing. Because of this time relationship. Phase status is time-dependent. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. and Temporary. 27 Click New. select Overridden. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. to which all the building model elements belong. and click OK. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. double-click Level 1 . On a logical time line. Demolished. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Floor Plans. click the Phase Filters tab. under Floor Plans. enter Composite Plan.Existing. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Later in this exercise. however. 28 Under Filter Name. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. under Phasing. In this case. new construction occurs after existing construction. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. under New.Demo.

Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. click OK. As you click each wall. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. its display changes to a red dashed line. under Floor Plans. There are two ways to demolish an element. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. select Demolished. 35 Click OK twice. double-click Level 1 . 39 In the Phasing dialog. select red. select the line style. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Phasing Your Model | 765 . Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. you begin demolition.Demo. When you demolish the host. under Cut ➤ Lines.31 Under Phase Status. 36 Using the same method. click (Demolish). Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. under Floor Plans. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 32 In the Demolished row. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 42 In the Project Browser. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. select the interior walls one at a time. you demolish all elements hosted by it. double-click Level 1 . or you can use the demolish tool. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. click the value for Color. select a lighter blue.Existing. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. 34 In the Color dialog. Next.

for Phase Filter. and click OK. under Phasing. 47 In the Type Selector. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter.Existing. 49 On the Design Bar. The demolished walls no longer display. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. click Wall.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. add a long horizontal wall. 52 Open Level 1 . for Phase Filter. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .Demo. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 Open Level 1 . and click OK. select Show Previous + New. under Phasing. 50 In the Type Selector. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 51 Add a door leading into each room. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Door.

Demo.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 61 On the View Control Bar. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. which are displayed as red. The renovated building model plan is displayed. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 57 In the Project Browser. Phasing Your Model | 767 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 60 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 62 If necessary. All elements are displayed in this view. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. 59 Open Level 1 . right-click Level 1 . because the phase filter is set to Show All. regardless of phase. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and existing shows as half-tone. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter.New. new is shown in blue.New.

If you wish to save this file. In this exercise. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. 3 Open Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.New. In this view. As the renovation process continues. go to the Settings menu. you can see the new walls added to the building model. All room boundaries are phase-specific. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. the rooms change in both definition and size. click Project Units. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. you can do so at this time. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. In this view.Existing. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. Notice that this view is the original building model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. therefore. sizes. you do not need to change the project units to metric. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. You can also see that the room quantities. and double-click Level 1 . and locations change depending on the phase of the project.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. demolition. expand Views (all). you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. In the next exercise. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. and click OK.Demo. and new construction. 2 Open Level 1 . define the units. If you wish to do so. 63 Close the file. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .rvt. click Training Files. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. expand Floor Plans.

11 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and maximize the view.Demo. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. yet they have different room numbers. 5 Click OK. click Modify. click Room Tag.Existing. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 10 Open Level 1 . notice that there are two phases defined in this project. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Room. In the Phasing dialog. click in each room as you move to the right. click Room. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner.New. 13 Open Level 1 . Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 6 Open Level 1 .

19 On the Window menu.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views.New Construction. click Tile. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. The two schedule views tile. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters.Existing. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. View phase-specific room schedules. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. 20 Close the file. In this case. expand Schedules/Quantities. 18 Open Room Schedule . 16 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. click Close Hidden Windows. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 17 On the Window menu. In addition. and double-click Room Schedule .

and manage the links throughout the project. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. performance. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. Comparison of alternatives on a site.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. modify their visibility. You position the building models on the site plan. In these situations. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. In this tutorial. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. 771 . This maximizes efficiency. In the final lesson.

Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . You position the building models on the site. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.Linking Building Models In this lesson. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You link two building models to the project. modify their visibility. and the other is a townhouse.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. One building model is a condominium. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry.

this option will place the link at a predefined location. click Open. and open Common\c_Site. RELATED See the lesson. click Save As.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. click Training Files. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. you can do so.rvt. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. and click OK.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. in the Model Linking folder that you created.■ Auto . This option is grayed out. Otherwise. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. and save the file there. this system is not exposed to the user. 4 On the File menu. Auto .By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. right-click. click Close. however. 5 On the File menu. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. 2 On the File menu. with write permission. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. Select c_Site. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. All three files now reside. select the three files. Click Open. ■ ■ Manual . use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. 8 Clear Read-only. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Open. and click Properties. Manual . c_Condo_Complex. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. c_Townhouse.

13 Click Open. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. you can go to the Settings menu. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. For Positioning.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. and make your changes. select Auto . If you wish to do so. click Project Units.Origin to Origin. expand Floor Plans. 11 On the File menu. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Notice the blue detail lines. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 10 In the Project Browser. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1.

The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. The Move command requires two clicks. After you select it. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The first click specifies the move start point. 16 For the move start point. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 15 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model.rvt displays in the Type Selector. The linked model moves as one object. 17 For the move endpoint. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 .

click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Origin to Origin. select Auto . 21 Click Open. 18 On the View menu. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. and select c_Townhouse. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.After you specify the location to move to.

click to specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. when the vertical line displays.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. In this case. click (Rotate). To rotate an object. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. 23 On the Edit toolbar. you first specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation.

This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move).The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration.

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. The first click specifies the start point. click (Copy). The Copy command works much like the Move command. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 30 For the starting point. and the second click specifies the copy-to point.

35 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity data. click Rotate. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. and click OK. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . for Name. click . if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 37 On the View toolbar. 34 On the Options Bar. 32 On the Edit menu. enter Townhouse A. click (Default 3D View).

click and hold Orbit. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. click Save. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. 2 On the SteeringWheels.38 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. After linking the files. In the next exercise. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you need this project file open and in this view. When you originally linked the files. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. they were placed too low within the site topography. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. In this exercise. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. do so before continuing. click (SteeringWheels).

TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you first select the plane you want to align to. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. and click to select the line. click (Align). This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. and then select the plane that you want to align. When using the Align command. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. and click OK. and double-click South. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project.rvt. under Views (all). To do this. 3 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In this case. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. and click to select it. when it highlights. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. Click the Revit Links tab. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. In the steps that follow. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project.

and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. double-click North. click 13 On the View toolbar. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 14 On the SteeringWheels. 11 Return to the South elevation view.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. 9 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). 12 On the View toolbar. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. click (Default 3D View). under Elevations. click Save. click and hold Orbit. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . 15 On the File menu.

7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 10 Click OK. display settings. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. 2 On the View menu. In the next exercise. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. click OK. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.rvt. expand c_Townhouse. under Elevations. click the Revit Links tab. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. 9 Under Visibility. or Custom. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. In this exercise. select <Custom>. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. By linked view. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. When you link a file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. double-click South. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and the halftone settings for each linked project. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. click By Host View. you need this project file open and in this view. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. As you can see. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.rvt. scroll down and clear Levels. 8 For Annotation Categories. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Custom. do so before continuing. 4 Under Visibility. If the Basics page is set to Custom. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. you can independently control the visibility settings. detail level. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. click Visibility/Graphics.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file.

rvt. In this case. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. no detail level changes are required. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 .rvt.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 24 Click OK. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. medium. 14 On the View menu. Using the Custom option. on the Basics tab. With linked files. and click OK. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. You can click the value for Detail Level. click the Revit Links tab. select <Custom>. 20 For c_Townhouse. click the Revit Links tab. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. click By Host View. 23 In the Model categories list. select Custom. or fine. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. double-click Level 1. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. By default. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. under Display Settings. 16 Under Visibility. under Floor Plans. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. By selecting custom under Model Categories.rvt. expand c_Townhouse. and then set the detail level to coarse. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. you can also apply halftone to individual categories.

a connection to the linked project continues to exist. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. In this case. click Custom for the Townhouse link. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. 31 On the File menu. on a sloped site for instance. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. With the Show All filter applied. and phase filter of a specific link. you need this project file open and in this view. By default. click Save.rvt. However. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. 29 Click OK. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. all new. All other components are grayed out. under Visibility. click OK. In the next exercise. existing. there are situations. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. In most cases. 25 On the Revit Links tab. 28 Select By linked view for View range. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. In this exercise. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case. demolished. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. 26 Under Display Settings. select c_Townhouse.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. this is preferable. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. you manage the linked files. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. phase. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial.

NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. and Saved Path fields are read only. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. 3 Under Path Type. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. In general. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. click the Revit tab. the link is maintained. 6 At the confirmation prompt. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. They supply information regarding the links. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. 7 Click OK. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates.rvt. Locations Not Saved. You learn more about this in the next lesson. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. 5 Click Unload.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. 4 Under Linked File. select c_Condo_Complex. In a shared coordinate environment. click Yes. Notice the Loaded. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. The default path type is Relative. do so before continuing. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. click Manage Links.

NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. 8 In the Project Browser. and select Specify. In general. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. If you choose not to open that workset. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. To do this. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .TIP In the Manage Links dialog. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. and click Reload. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. click Save As. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. click the arrow next to the Open button. When you initially place the link.rvt. 9 On the File menu. expand Revit Links. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. the link is not loaded. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. right-click c_Condo_Complex. However. In these cases.

If you intend to complete the next lesson now. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. and save it as an RVT file. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you have not completed the previous lesson. In this exercise. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). The host file consists primarily of site components. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. In essence. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. leave the project file open in its current view. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. When you share coordinates between projects.10 In the Save As dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. name the file Site_Project. do so before continuing. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. you are establishing a shared origin point. and the resulting project files. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . When used in conjunction with model linking.

790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. When you are working in the host project. As indicated in the Status Bar. If you have closed the project. and the resulting project files. Linking Building Models on page 772. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. click the Condo Complex. 3 In the drawing area. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. 2 On the Tools menu. In this case. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file.rvt and click Open. open it before continuing. If you have not completed the lesson. do so before continuing. Select Site_Project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project.coordinates are used. click Open.

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. On the Status Bar. when the edges highlight. even though both models originate from one linked file. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. click to select it. do so before continuing. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. you need this project file open and in this view. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . and Lot C. and click OK. this location is not saved outside of the host project. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. However. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. In this exercise. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. but can have multiple additional locations. select Location 1. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. Lot B. 5 On the Design Bar. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. These three locations can be named Lot A. If you have not completed the exercise. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. it is placed at a specific location.

notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. click Change. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. select Move instance to. 12 On the Options Bar. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. enter Lot A for New. 4 Under Value. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Not Shared for Shared Location. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. click Rename. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. In the Choose Location dialog. Record the current position as a location. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. click Reconcile. click . This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. and click OK.2 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. 7 In the Rename dialog. click OK. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. . 9 In the Select Location dialog. When constraining a link to a location. This is a one-time operation. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location.

select the second option. 19 In the Select Location dialog. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. The first click specifies the move start point. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. you cannot redefine its location. When you release the mouse button. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. and click OK. select Save. and click OK. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. When you create a location. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and then select the townhouse project. To explicitly save a location. click Manage Links. Save locations 21 On the File menu. This is a two-click process. Record current position as. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. click the Revit tab. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. By relocating a project. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . make sure Lot B is selected. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. enter Lot B for Name. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. ignore the warning. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. click OK. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. When you relocate a project. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. click OK. the active location position is moved. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 23 Click Save Locations. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. or cancel the action. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 30 On the Tools menu. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. a warning displays.Notice the OK button is not active. 16 Click Change. 26 Click OK. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. Because Lot A is currently in use. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. Notice the OK button is still not active. and the left townhouse resides at that location.

select Save. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 34 On the File menu. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. NOTE In the following exercise.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. click Save. 36 On the File menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. click Close. In this exercise. and click OK. 33 On the Edit menu.

click Open. Click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.By Shared Coordinates. In addition. Because this building model only has one named location. Also. double-click 1st Floor. When opening the linked file. select Auto .rvt file. Select c_Condo_Complex. if other models were linked into the same host. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. it is placed automatically within the host project. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. If you have not completed the exercises. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. under Floor Plans. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. For Positioning. do so before continuing. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. The current active location is Lot A. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu. In this exercise.

In this exercise. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. click OK. 6 Select Lot B. click Manage Place and Locations. In the host file. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click Make Current. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. If you have not completed the exercises. select True North for Orientation. click Manage Place and Locations. 7 Click OK. you can select Lot C if necessary. click Duplicate. you create a new location. you need this project file open and in this view. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. under Graphics. orient a view to true north. enter Lot C. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. 3 In the Name dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. do so before continuing. click View Properties. you manage the shared locations. and click OK. and click OK.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the next exercise. In this exercise. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

In this exercise. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . click Close. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 10 On the File menu. On the Options Bar. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. do so before continuing. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. If you have not completed the exercise.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Open. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. You can save the file if you wish.

Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Count.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Under Available fields. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. and click OK. under Category. select Doors. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files.

Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You have completed this tutorial. 12 Select Grand totals. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. click Close. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. clear Itemize every instance. 13 On the File menu. 14 On the File menu. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. select Family and Type for Sort by. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. In this exercise. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Door Schedule.8 Click OK. under Other. expand Schedules/Quantities. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. and then click OK twice. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Properties. click Save.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

you modify the system environment. These settings control the graphics.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. under Template file. and click OK. 10 In the Options dialog. select Invert background color. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. click the Graphics tab. click Training Files. click the Graphics tab. you create an office template. and your username when using worksets. Finally. they are not saved to project files or template files. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 8 In the New Project dialog. journal cleanup options. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. notification preferences. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. and set it as your default template. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 3 In the Options dialog. Notice that the drawing area is black. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 4 Under Colors. In the first lesson. click Browse.rte. click the value for Selection color. 803 . 6 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. selection default options. click OK. In the second lesson. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 11 Under Colors. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. which is independent of the project settings. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

select None. select yellow. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 13 Click the General tab.rvt. click Modify. and open Metric\m_Settings. the elements causing the error display using this color. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. 22 When prompted to save changes. click No. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. For Tooltip assistance. select One hour. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.12 In the Color dialog. 15 Click OK. click the Graphics tab. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. However. click Wall. 19 On the Design Bar. When an error occurs. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. For Selection color. 26 In the Options dialog. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 14 Under Notifications. and select the wall. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Training Files. clear Invert background color. select red. and click OK.

Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 10 In the Places dialog. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. select the folder to save your files to by default.27 Click the General tab. including your default project template. 7 In the Options dialog. do not save the changes. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. For Tooltip assistance. notice the list of library names. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. These files are used in the software support process. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. click Places. select Normal. If prompted. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Your login name displays by default. 8 Click Cancel. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. centralized. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. click the File Locations tab. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click Browse. click Browse. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. and click Open. such as in a large. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. However. 4 Click Cancel. Specifying File Locations on page 805. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 3 Under Default template file. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. TIP To view a template. under Default path for family template files. 2 In the Options dialog. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Under Username. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. you can start a new project with that template. family template files. you specify default file locations. 5 Under Default path for user files. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. click Browse. and family libraries. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Under Journal File Cleanup. and click Browse to select a template. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. select your preferred Save reminder interval.

806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . TIP You may want to create a new folder first. In the following illustration. 11 In the Places dialog. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects.library names and path. templates. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. When you are opening. or loading a Revit Architecture file. and click Open. and select it as the library path. and change the name to My Library. Load. click (Add Value). or families. saving. under Libraries. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click the icon side of the field. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. and Import dialogs. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. Save. and you can create new libraries.

enter sheetmtl-Cu. click My Library. 3 Under Settings. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 24 Click 25 Click OK. click Edit. 22 Click Places. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. If you want to relocate this path. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Save. 19 Click Cancel. view the current path. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 5 In the text editor. custom color files. specify the new location here. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 Under Library Name. If you work in a large office. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 2 In the Options dialog. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 23 Select My Library. 28 Click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 9 In the text editor. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. such as bump maps. and decal image files. click the Spelling tab. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and Import dialogs. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . click the My Library icon. This path is determined during installation. 21 Click the File Locations tab. and click OK twice. Load. click Edit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807.

25 Proceed to the next exercise. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. work with snapping turned off. do not save the changes. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. under Template file. click Text. 19 Under Settings. click Modify. click Edit. click default template. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click OK. click Browse. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. delete sheetmtl-CU. As you zoom in and out within a view. you modify snap increments. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 23 In the Options dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click OK. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. If prompted. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click Restore Defaults. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.rte. click the Spelling tab. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 18 In the Options dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.11 In the Options dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 21 In the text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. you modify snap settings. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 2 In the New Project dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. click Training Files. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. In this exercise. click OK. 22 In the text editor. 20 Under Personal dictionary. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.

While sketching. For example.6 Under Dimension Snaps. click Wall. TIP To zoom while sketching. snapping reverts to the system default settings. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 7 Under Object Snaps. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. use the wheel button on your mouse. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. If you do not have a wheel button. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. enter SM. click OK. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and enter 500 . clear Chain. zoom out until it does so. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.. If it does not. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . such as ZO to zoom out. 8 In the Snaps dialog. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 10 On the Options Bar.

21 Move the cursor downward. and the wall edges. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. click Modify. If you move the cursor along the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. and specify the wall endpoint. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. and delete the value 500 . and click Wall. and do not save the file. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. and move the cursor to the right. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the midpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Do not set the wall end point. 18 Enter SM.. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 24 Click OK. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. This is the increment that you added previously. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.

When you apply a material to an element. annotations. click Training Files. Using these options. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. fill patterns. In the steps that follow. lines. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Finally. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. save the project file with a unique name. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. and open Metric\m_Settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. you render a region to observe the changes. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . and object styles. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. You create and modify materials.rvt.

scale. and double-click 02 Entry Level. 3 Click (Duplicate). and click OK. When you change properties of a render appearance. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. and texture of the material. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . When a model element is loaded into a project. The properties describe the color. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. this material provides a starting point for the new material. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. In the steps that follow. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . However. and click (Element Properties). Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 11 Click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. select Stone.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. enter Masonry . read-only library for render appearances. These details will display in rendered images. In the Materials dialog. 9 Click Apply. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. for Class.Fieldstone material. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. and select Masonry . 10 Click the Graphics tab.Fieldstone. Masonry . In the next exercise. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. and click OK.Fieldstone. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog.Stone. 6 Click Replace. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. The Render Appearance Library is a local. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog.

Fieldstone. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 26 On the View Control Bar. 25 On the View toolbar. 17 For Structure. click (Default 3D View). select the rear exterior wall. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall.Fieldstone.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Type Selector. click This is the material that you created. select Masonry . 18 For Finish 1. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. and click OK. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click Model Graphics Style. click Edit. . click Edit/New. and click OK. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . click in the Material field. 21 Click OK three times. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Fieldstone on CMU. 20 In the Materials dialog. 15 Click Duplicate. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry .Brick. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. 16 Enter the new wall name. 19 On the right side of the Material field. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 23 While pressing CTRL.

and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. 32 In the Rendering dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. and click Rendering. under Quality. select Low or Medium. In the following exercise. 28 In the Rendering dialog. select Region. The rendering process begins. for Setting. click Render. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. 31 In the Rendering dialog. click Rendering Dialog. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. When finished. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. select the render region (a red rectangle). Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 29 In the 3D view.

4 Scroll down the list of patterns. click Import. 5 Click New. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Drafting pattern density is fixed. click Show the model. choose Model. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. in the Rendering dialog. expand Elevations. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Show the model. and double-click West. 33 In the Rendering dialog. m_Settings-in progress. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. Then click Render again. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . 3 Under Pattern Type. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. and clear Region.rvt. 7 Under Custom.rvt. select Custom. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Zoom into the model. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. such as steel.

14 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . click in the Material field. click Training Files. 22 Click OK three times. and click OK. for Finish 1.56. 10 For Name. click Edit. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. (Element Properties). 9 Under Custom. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and for Import scale. 21 In the Materials dialog.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click OK. click to select a fill pattern. enter . click 15 For Structure. 11 Click OK. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 18 Under Surface Pattern. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . enter Fieldstone. click Modify. select fldstn. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog.pat. select Model.Fieldstone material. click . Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. and click OK. In the Materials dialog. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click Edit/New. 23 On the Design Bar. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 13 On the Options Bar. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model.Fieldstone. under Pattern Type. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

TIP If the pattern does not display.rvt. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. For example. click (Default 3D View). You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type.25 On the View toolbar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . m_Settings-in progress. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. expand 3D Views. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. there are often multiple window types within a project. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 2 On the keyboard. and double-click 3 Windows. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

7 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Element Properties). under Materials and Finishes. 5 On the Options Bar. click By Category (located under the materials list). 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click Modify. and click . This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. . and click 15 Click OK twice. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click in the Value column. for Trim Exterior Material. click By Category. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. for Trim Exterior Material. click Edit/New. under Materials and Finishes. 10 Select the arched window. 8 In the Materials dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Materials dialog. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray.

and click OK.red paint. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. click OK. select Paint. 18 On the Model Objects tab. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . select Trim. click OK. or keywords include the word red. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. descriptions. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. . When you render a 3D view. and click OK. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. 23 Click Replace. 28 Under Shading. 29 In the Materials dialog. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. for Name. 25 In the search field. (Duplicate). click in the Material column. and select Trim. 19 For Trim. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. enter Trim . for Class. expand Windows. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. type red. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim.

is open with the 3D view active. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. select Roof Line. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 10 For Line Color. select Red. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. m_Settings-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click New. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 7 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . (Default 3D view). 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.rvt. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.rvt. enter Roof Line. 11 For Line Pattern. Use object styles to apply the change to all views.31 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. for Name. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. Now that you have created a line pattern. select Roofs. under Category. m_Settings-in progress. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice.

13 In the Project Browser. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . but not the line pattern. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. 14 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. double-click to Building.12 Click OK. Notice that the line color displays in this view. under 3D Views.

For Pattern. under Floor Plans. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. For Color. for Visibility. select Black. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Solid. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Roofs. 18 For Line Color. select Blue. 22 On the Model Categories tab.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. select Roofs. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. under Category. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. double-click 03 Roof. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Plans. sections. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Override. 15 In the Project Browser. elevations. 20 Click OK. select 5. 19 For Line Pattern. select Roof Line.

select Level: 02 Entry Level. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. select Double dash. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 34 On the Options Bar. select Red. click Lines. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. click New. specify the following: ■ For Plane. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . under Modify Subcategories. enter Zoning Setback. select Zoning Setback. and click OK.25 Click OK twice. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. double-click Site. 33 In the Type Selector. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. 31 Click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. Click Click (Draw). select 2. (Line). For Line Color. under Floor Plans. 29 For Name. For Line Pattern. This places the line above the topography.

40 In the Project Browser. 44 On the View toolbar. double-click 02 Entry Level.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. Expand Site. and clear Zoning Setback. NOTE If Site is not selected. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Annotations on page 825. select it. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 36 On the View toolbar. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and then clear Property Lines. (Default 3D View). expand Lines. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. click (Default 3D View). click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. and clear Zoning Setback. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. 38 On the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. 43 Click OK. and clear Property Lines. 39 Click OK.

10 On the Standard toolbar. Modifying Annotations | 825 . 5 Under Text. click Duplicate. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. select Feet and fractional inches. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. double-click 02 Entry Level.rvt. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Enter the name Linear . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. For Units. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. and then click outside the second wall. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 7 Click OK twice. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Units Format. click the default value. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. select Linear . (Undo).Imperial. click Dimension.Imperial and click OK. and place a dimension on the floor plan. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click one wall. m_Settings-in progress.rvt. under Floor Plans. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. click another wall. m_Settings-in progress. You have created a new dimension style. To place a dimension. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

15 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Click OK.14 On the Options Bar. under Category. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. notice that the label displays 1i. 18 In the Tags dialog. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 21 In the Tags dialog. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 22 Under Loaded Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. click M_Window Tag .Number is now the assigned tag. In the preview image.Number. Leave M_Window Tag . In the steps that follow. click Training Files. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. scroll down to Windows. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. click Tag ➤ By Category. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 28 On the Design Bar. Then press Delete. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Number as the assigned tag. select the 3 window tags. click the bottom window. 19 Click Load. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . click (Element Properties). 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. clear Leader. 27 On the west wall.Number. 24 While pressing CTRL.rfa. 16 Click Cancel. 26 On the Options Bar. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag .

notice Window Tags appears twice. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Specifying Units of Measurement. Unless overridden. you specify the project units of measurements. Temporary Dimensions. click the default value. 30 Under Leader. and click OK. 8 Under Walls. 6 Click OK. (Default 3D View). click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Specifying Units of Measurement. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. 4 In the Project Units dialog. select Faces. In the second section. select To the nearest 100. In the final section. 32 On the View toolbar. dimension values display using this setting. click the default value. select 0 decimal places.Number. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. For Unit symbol. select Openings. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. m_Settings-in progress. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. In the first section. for Area. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Unless overridden.Temporary Dimensions. the other displays the instance value. click Modify. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. you modify the temporary dimension settings. you modify the detail level assignments.Under Category. select meters squared. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values.rvt. and Detail Level Options | 827 . and Detail Level Options In this exercise. verify that Create is clear. 31 On the Design Bar. M_Window Tag . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Temporary Dimensions. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Specifying Units of Measurement. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Click OK. dimensions use these project settings. 3 In the Format dialog. and click OK. for Rounding. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. for Length. and click OK. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. and Detail Level Options on page 827.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. In this exercise. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 12 Click OK. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. You do not select a view scale to move it.In this project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this table. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. When you create a new view and specify its view scale.rvt. click Training Files. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. and expand 3D Views.

expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 2 In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 5 On the Views tab. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 .Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. select Type/Discipline. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and notice that each is grouped by discipline.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and click OK. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . and click Apply. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 8 Select Phase. 6 In the Project Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand each view type. notice that views are grouped by phase.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. and click OK. select Discipline.

and click OK. expand each sheet set. and click OK. under Sheets. and click New. click the Folders tab.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. 16 Click the Views tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

View Type (Family and Type). In this lesson. 2 Under Template file. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. expand Complete. In that case. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. For example. click Browse. enter a unique file name. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Whenever you create a new project or template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. when you create a new project. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. Creating an Office Template on page 831. you create an office template. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. and open Metric\Templates. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 21 In the Project Browser. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. If you want to save this file. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. dimensions styles. Proceed to the next lesson. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. and click OK. expand 3D Views. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. click Training Files. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. levels. and view names. you select the starting point for your office template. the same rules apply. and Discipline. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. You can choose from several templates. In the lesson that follows. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. When you create new projects. navigate to your preferred directory.rte template. under Views. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and click Open. and click OK. When you create a new template based on an existing template. You can also save these settings in a template file. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. Creating an Office Template | 831 . and expand both Architectural and Structural. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template.20 In the Browser Organization dialog.

For example. 9 In the Project Browser. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. close them. 13 Select the default template. In this exercise. you can select it now. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above.5 In the New Project dialog. 6 Click OK. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. and click OK. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. weights. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. and double-click North. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. 14 Click Open. you modify the project settings for your new template. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. select Project. for Create new. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. click Browse. If you have additional projects open. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. in the drawing area. 12 Under Template File. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. select Project template. When you create the material. If you want to use a template other than the default. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 15 Under Create new.

7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. When you create or modify a material. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. create and modify them as needed. 4 Click Replace. texture. You do this by defining the render appearance. 2 Scroll down the materials list. line colors. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 9 Click OK when finished. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. the changes are saved as part of the project template. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. or refer to the online help. For more information. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. You can align. you can set line weights. and imported objects. specific modifications are not dictated. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. see the previous lesson. including color. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. transparency. rotate. In the Object Styles dialog. or modify existing patterns. create new subcategories. Observe the materials that are already defined. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. and move model patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. annotation objects. or refer to the online help. and similar attributes.During this exercise. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. see a preview of the rendered material. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. For more details on modifying these settings. and change render appearance properties. and materials for model objects. Modifying System Settings on page 803. line patterns. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. TIP For more information about creating new materials. 13 If necessary. If you change render appearance properties.

The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 20 Click OK. or line pattern as needed. and specify the properties. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. and click Edit. 19 If necessary. To see the details of a particular style. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 18 For existing line categories. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 29 Click OK. line color. click Duplicate. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. such as section lines and dimension lines. and create new subcategories as needed. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. tags. and dimensions. 32 To modify a line pattern.15 Modify categories. name the style. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. modify the line weight. 34 Click OK. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. select it from this list. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. select it. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. create new line subcategories. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. You can add and delete view scales. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. and specify the properties. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. and radial dimensions are modified separately. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category.40 Click OK. 50 To load new annotation tags. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. click Duplicate. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. and Angle settings. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . Linear. angular. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Volume. select it from this list. when you add a door with the tag option selected. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 57 Specify the Slope option. 62 Click OK. name the style. 60 Under Walls. 53 For Length. 61 Under Doors and Windows. and choose a decimal symbol. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. To see the details of a particular style. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 55 Click OK. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. In the Tags dialog. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. For example. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. click Format. 58 Click OK. 46 Click OK. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. click Load. and click OK. TIP In the drawing area. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles.

you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. or edit existing organization types. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 69 If necessary. 68 Delete. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. You can find additional information in Help.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 72 If necessary. create new browser organization types. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. click the arrows between columns. However. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. 71 Delete. To move the view scales. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. The detail level is based on view scale. For example. and move view scales as needed. Use the table below as a checklist. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. create new browser organization types. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Although these settings can be saved within a template. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. Each command is available on the Settings menu. rename. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. In such a case. rename. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. In a typical project. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. or edit existing organization types. Medium. Using the arrows between the columns. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 70 Click the Sheets tab. and make modifications in each area as necessary. or Fine. click the Views tab. When you create a new view. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. 65 Click OK. 73 Click OK. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. See Setting up If necessary. Links to associated tutorials are provided. 64 Review the table.

If you have not completed the previous exercise. furniture. and the poche depth. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can move onto the next component type. you can set up the phases. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. if you load every available window type. You can load any family or group into a template. you do both. Although the options are endless. In the steps that follow. title blocks. or electrical fixtures. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. If necessary. 2 In the Type Selector. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. However. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. If this selection is satisfactory. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. phase filters. or use the Project Browser. click Door. and electrical fixtures. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. or add to this selection. For example. the section cut material. you may want to delete. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. you can set the default contour line interval. Although this is possible. do so before starting this exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Depending on the intended use of this template. there are some important thoughts to consider. notice the list of doors already loaded. you could load detail components. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. modify. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. For example. In addition.

Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. In the Element Properties dialog. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. create. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Enter a name. and click OK. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. click Edit/New. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Modify type properties. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. create. or load a new door type. expand Families. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. or modify a door. Make modifications. click Load. Select it. Click Duplicate. click Bar. click Edit/New. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types.3 To modify. and click Open. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Notice that each family category is listed.

15 Proceed to the next exercise. In addition. View Range. you created new projects using different templates. right-click the component. and click Delete. (Element Properties). 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. load. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. Detail Level.) 10 Expand the title block. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. and select the title block type. To load a title block. click Load. In addition. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. you create the views required for your template. 11 On the Options Bar. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. This title block is currently part of the template. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. click 12 Click Preview. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. To do so. create.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. In this exercise. 13 Click OK. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. Discipline. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command.

These values represent the starting point for each plan view. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. double-click South. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 11 Click Apply. open the view from the Project Browser. select Site Plan. and apply the appropriate template. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 4 If necessary.settings of categories and subcategories. Every time a new plan view is created. click Apply. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. After applying the template. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. In addition. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 15 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Project Browser. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. and then click OK. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. At any time. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. select Architectural Plan. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. click Apply. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. under Floor Plans. 2 Under Names. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. under Elevations. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 6 Click OK. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 18 If you modified any other view templates. you can apply a view template to any view. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. you will first modify view templates. double-click Site. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. double-click Level 2. and click OK.

To orient the 3D view to another view. To orient the 3D view to a direction. 30 In the Project Browser. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. review the floor plans. If it does not display. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. Rename. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click Save View. review the existing floor plans. right-click Level 1. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. (Default 3D View). The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 20 In the Project Browser. Black level heads have no associated views. 23 To add more levels to the template. right-click the view name. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . If prompted. and click Properties. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. Blue level heads have associated plan views. in the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. a face. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. right-click {3D}. click Schedule/Quantities. or delete them as needed. and select the desired view. ceiling plans. notice that you have the option to rename. or delete this view. click Level. enter a view name. right-click the ViewCube. right-click the ViewCube. click Orient to View. select Make Plan View. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and. duplicate. click Orient to a Direction. 31 Rename the 3D View. duplicate. click 29 In the Project Browser. and elevations. By default. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. right-click the ViewCube. expand 3D Views.Notice the level names. If you want to modify view properties. and select the desired direction. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. 27 Create additional levels as needed. under 3D Views. or an edge of the ViewCube. 21 In the Project Browser. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. on the View toolbar. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. in the shortcut menu. 24 On the Options Bar. use the ViewCube.

TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. click Sheet. You can still add views to the sheet. select the default title block. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. or exportlayersdgn. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. After the sheet is created. click Add View. select the title block and delete it. On the Filter tab. modify settings as needed. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template.You can add schedules to a template. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. On the Formatting tab. 40 To add views to the sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 43 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. On the Appearance tab.txt for AutoCAD. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Select a view. When you import a DWG or DXF file. in the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all).txt for MicroStation). 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. select one. To do so. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. modify settings as needed. and click OK. 42 Create new sheets as needed. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. select the category type. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. To later add a title block to a sheet. modify settings as needed. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. and click OK. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. and click OK. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. 37 Click OK. You are prompted to select a title block. select and order required fields. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. assign filters. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and modify their properties accordingly. Right-click the sheet name.

Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. 5 For each category.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. You can save these mappings to a text file. click Save As. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. They cannot be shared with other projects. select Save As. and related multi-category tags and schedules. and click Save. project parameters. and so on. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. name the file. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. and so on. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. For example. When you create a multi-category schedule. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. When you import a DWG or DXF file. When scheduling. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . doors. therefore. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and they become the set mappings for the project. These settings are retained within the project template. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and click Save. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. name the file. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Using shared parameters. windows. for example. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. name the file. 2 For each category. 9 Click Save As. 8 In the dialog. and click Save. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category.

and choose a shared parameter. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select a parameter discipline type. select a parameter value type. and specify its discipline and type. If a file already exists. add required parameters. 25 Click Select. 16 Under Parameter Data. you can create a list of parameters. you may want to save the file to a network location. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 9 Name the parameter. 23 Add project parameters as needed. click New. 14 Click Add. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. under Groups. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. because each office has a unique set of needs. 17 Under Discipline. project parameters. 10 Click OK. 5 Enter the group name. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 24 To add a shared project parameter. 21 Under Categories. 2 Click Create. select a group to add parameters to. 22 Click OK. 19 Under Group parameter under.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 8 Under Parameters. For each parameter group. click Add. 3 Name and save the file. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 11 For each parameter group. click New. select Project parameter. and select Shared Parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 18 Under Type of Parameter. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 26 Click OK. enter a parameter name. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and click OK. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. If this template will be used by multiple team members.

6 In the New dialog. enter a name for the schedule. you can set options such as sheet sizes. For each printer. In this exercise. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. or refer to the online help. The tag is now part of the template. you need only select a setting. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. click Setup. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. and print. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 4 Modify the printer settings. you create named print settings. and click Open. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. paper placement. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. select Multi-Category.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 5 Click Save As. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 32 Navigate to the directory. select the tag. 3 Under Settings. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. By creating named settings within the template. Click OK. make minor modifications if necessary. click OK. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 2 Under Printer. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. and the percent of actual size. By going first to the Print command. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . 28 Click OK. and make it your default template file. 37 When you have completed the schedule. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 34 For Category. and click OK. save the file as a template. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. click Schedule/Quantities. for Name. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 35 For Name. For information on creating multi-category tags. you can load them into the template. 39 Proceed to the final exercise.

select Template Files (*. enter a new name for the printer. loaded components. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. save it in a network location. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 18 Click Browse. click Save as. 14 Under Save as type. you ensure that office standards are maintained. The only remaining task is to save it. 22 Click the File Locations tab. and click Open. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 20 Click OK. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. If you have a project. 24 Navigate to the template location. 19 Select the template. and click Open. you modified settings. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 11 Click Close when finished. select a different printer. and create new settings for this printer. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 25 Click OK. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. By investing the time to individualize your template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 9 In the Print dialog.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. click Setup. select it. If you need to share this file with others. You can also set this template as your default template. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In addition. Create additional settings as needed. and saved them to a template.rte). and click OK. 15 Name the template. In addition. click Browse. In this lesson. 23 For Default template file. modify the printer settings. Your template is complete. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. and click Save.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful